· FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY FIT PROJECT C1307 POMERANTZ ROOF RENOVATION 6 MAY 2016 100% CD WRL #15073.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS ©Westlake Reed Leskosky TOC - 1 …

©W estlake Reed Leskosky

Project Manual

Fashion Institute of Technology

Fred P. Pomerantz Art and Design Center

Roof Renovation Building D

300 7th

Avenue

New York, NY 10001

WRL Commission No. 15073.00

May 6, 2016

100% Construction Documents

FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY FIT PROJECT C1307

POMERANTZ ROOF RENOVATION 6 MAY 2016

100% CD

WRL #15073.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS

©Westlake Reed Leskosky TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - BIDDING AND PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS

-- FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY: NOTICE TO BIDDERS,

ATTACHMENTS, SPECIFICATIONS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, BID

ANALYSIS FORM

00 31 26 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION

-- ASBESTOS INSPECTION REPORT

00 60 00 PROJECT FORMS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY

01 22 00 UNIT PRICES

01 23 00 ALTERNATES

01 31 01 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION FORM

01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01 73 00 EXECUTION

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02 82 00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

DIVISION 03

NOT USED

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 01 20.63 BRICK MASONRY REPAIR

04 01 20.64 BRICK MASONRY REPOINTING

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 54 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 16 00 SHEATHING

06 20 23 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY



100% CD



DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 01 50.19 PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING

07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS

07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION

07 21 19 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

07 55 56 FLUID-APPLIED REINFORCED MEMBRANE ROOFING

07 59 00 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES

07 71 29 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES

07 72 73 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 62 00 UNIT SKYLIGHTS

08 80 00 GLAZING

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISIONS 10 – 11

NOT USED

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 24 86 SKYLIGHT WINDOW SHADES

DIVISION 21

NOT USED

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

22 14 23 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION

23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS



100% CD



DIVISIONS 24 – 25

NOT USED

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

06 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRCAL SYSTEMS

26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

26 29 13 MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

DIVISION 27 - 49

NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION

©Westlake Reed Leskosky 003126 - 1

DOCUMENT 003126 - EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION

1.1 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION

A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting

Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are

intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made

available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing

conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

B. An existing asbestos report for Project, prepared by Environmental Planning & Management,

dated January 5, 2016, is available for viewing as appended to this Document.

END OF DOCUMENT 003126

1983 Marcus Avenue, Suite 109, Lake Success, New York 11042 (516) 328-1194 Fax (516) 328-1381

January 5, 2016 Mr. John Adamek, RA Westlake Reed Leskosky 1201 Broadway, Suite 1006 New York, New York 10001 Re: Asbestos Inspection Report Pomerantz Art and Design Center

(Building D) Roof Renovation Fashion Institute of Technology 300 Seventh Avenue, New York, New York 10001 EPM Project No. 14018-03

Dear Mr. Adamek: Environmental Planning & Management (EPM) performed a limited inspection for the presence of asbestos containing materials (ACMs) at the Pomerantz Art and Design Center of the Fashion Institute of Technology (FIT) located at 300 Seventh Avenue, New York, New York. EPM employees and New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) certified Asbestos Inspectors Thomas Zabransky and Oudens Delice conducted the inspection. The inspection was performed by EPM as a sub-consultant to Westlake Reed Leskosky, on November 16, November 17, November 18, and December 3, 2015. Personnel certificates and the company license are included as Attachment A. Construction Scope of Work The proposed scope of work is the renovation of the entire roof of the Pomerantz Art & Design Center (FIT Building D). This renovation also includes the installation of new skylights on the main roof area. The roofs of the mechanical equipment room and stairwell bulkhead will also be replaced as part of this work. Inspection Scope of Work The scope of work for this investigation was limited to the characterization - through inspection and/or sampling and laboratory analysis - of the visible and

accessible suspect asbestos containing materials on the roof that will be impacted based on the scope of work and sketch provided by Westlake Reed Leskosky Architects dated 10/14/15. Refer to Table 1 for a summary of all asbestos containing materials identified within the project area. Asbestos Bulk Sampling Bulk samples were collected for laboratory analysis from the following types of Suspect Asbestos Containing Materials:

• Tar on concrete roof decking • Roofing base sheet • Foamglass / Perlite black insulation board • Built up roofing layer • Tar on built up roofing layer • Lightweight concrete layer • Felt paper • Caulking on door frame of roof stairway bulkhead • Flashing tar • Grey caulking on metal cap of low parapet • Black caulking on metal cap of low parapet • Black mastic under metal cap of high parapet • Tar paper under metal cap of low parapet • Tar on bricks under metal cap of low parapet • Pitch pocket tar • Tar on skylights metal caps • Tar on metal flashing • White waterproofing coating on low parapet • Mechanical room floor coating

The asbestos bulk sample locations are shown on drawing ASB-1 Asbestos Bulk Sample Location Schematic. The suspect asbestos containing material samples were delivered under chain of custody documentation to Alpha Labs LLC, located in Long Island City, New York for asbestos analysis. The laboratory was instructed to analyze the asbestos bulk samples in accordance with New York State Department of Health (NYSDOH) Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP) Methods for Asbestos Analysis. Friable samples were analyzed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) via ELAP Method 198.1. Non-friable organically bound materials (NOBs) were analyzed by PLM NOB via ELAP Method 198.6. NOBs with an asbestos concentration less than or equal to one percent were re-analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) with gravimetric preparation via ELAP Method 198.4. Only the first two NOBs from each homogeneous material group were analyzed by TEM.

Alpha Labs is certified under the NYS DOH ELAP (certification #11833) and the United States Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (certification #200691-0). Laboratory accreditation documentation is included as Attachment B. Asbestos Results of Sampled Materials Lab analysis indicated the following sampled materials to be asbestos containing:

• Tar on the built up roofing layer • Black mastic under metal cap of high parapet • Tar paper under metal cap of low parapet • Tar on bricks under metal cap of low parapet • Tar on skylights metal caps • Tar on metal flashings

Asbestos Bulk Sample Laboratory Analytical Data and chain of custody documentation is included as Attachment C. A summary of asbestos bulk sample laboratory analytical results is included as Table 2. Representative photographs of all identified asbestos containing materials are included as Attachment D. Asbestos Containing Material locations are shown on drawing ACM-1. Conclusions / Recommendations Asbestos Asbestos and Presumed Asbestos Materials have been identified within areas affected by the work for this project. All asbestos materials that will be impacted by this project should be removed and disposed of in accordance with all applicable local, State, and Federal regulations. All asbestos contaminated materials must be properly abated and disposed of by a licensed asbestos contractor prior to the initiation of renovation and/or demolition work (or any other impact to these materials) by other trades. Limitations This investigation was limited to characterization of visible and accessible materials that are anticipated to be impacted by the proposed work. Additional suspect asbestos containing materials may be present within inaccessible areas not characterized by this investigation. If design development or field scope modifications necessitate impact to any suspect asbestos containing materials, other than those described herein, these materials must be protected from impact and the FIT project manager should be notified immediately to arrange for further inspection and sampling as necessary to determine if specialized handling and disposal are required.

Attached to this letter are the following: Tables Table 1 – Summary of Asbestos Containing Materials Table 2 – Summary of Asbestos Bulk Sample Laboratory Analytical Results Drawings ASB-1 – Asbestos Bulk Sample Location Schematic ACM-1 – Asbestos Containing Material Locations Attachments Attachment A – Personnel Certificates and Company License Attachment B – Laboratory Accreditation Documentation, Alpha Labs Attachment C – Asbestos Bulk Sample Laboratory Analytical Data & Chain of Custody Documentation, Lab work order number: 15-11-089 and 15-12-068 Attachment D – Photographs of Identified and Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials If you require any additional information, please do not hesitate to contact me. Respectfully,

Thomas Zabransky Asbestos Inspector, New York State Department of Labor certificate # 90-14215

TABLES

Table 1Summary of Identified Asbestos Containing Materials

Roof of Fred Pomerantz Art and Design Center (Building D)Fashion Institute of Technology

EPM Project Number: 14018-03 T1-1 EPMCO.com

Material Description Material Locations Asbestos Quantity Friability Condition Photo

Number

Tar Built up roofing layer 17,460 SF Non-Friable Good A1, A2,

A3, A7

Black Mastic Under metal cap of high parapet 550 SF Non-

Friable Good A8

Tar Paper Under metal cap of low parapet 300 SF Non-

Friable Good A9

Tar Bricks under metal cap of low parapet 300 SF Non-

Friable Good A10

Tar On skylights caps 50 SF Non-Friable Good A12

Tar

On metal flashing of MER bulkhead wall,

high parapet wall and fan unit

1,100 SF Non-Friable Good A11, A14

Table 2 Summary of Asbestos Bulk Sample Laboratory Analytical Results

Roof Renovation of Pomerantz Art and Design CenterFashion Institute of Technology


Sampling Sample

Location Description PLM TEM

POM1116-01A

15-11-089-01

POM1116-01B

15-11-089-02

POM1116-01C

15-11-089-03

POM1116-02A

15-11-089-04

POM1116-02B

15-11-089-05

POM1116-02C

15-11-089-06

POM1116-03A

15-11-089-07

POM1116-03B

15-11-089-08

POM1116-03C

15-11-089-09

POM1116-04A

15-11-089-10

POM1116-04B

15-11-089-11

POM1116-04C

15-11-089-12

EPM Sample I.D./

Lab Sample I.D.

Asbestos Content

Probe 5 - West roof center

Probe 15 - East side of main roof

Probe 18 - MER bulkheadn roof south side


No Asbestos Detected


Not Analyzed


Tar on concrete roof decking

Inconclusive, No Asbestos

DetectedInconclusive, No Asbestos

Detected


Detected


Detected


Not Analyzed


Detected


Detected

Foamglass black insulation board


Detected



Detected



DetectedNot Analyzed


Probe 20 - MER bulkhead roof center

Roofing base sheet

Probe 1 - West roof, north side




Built up roofing layer


Detected


Probe 16 - Main roof south east side


Detected


Probe 18 - MER bulkhead roof south side






Sampling Sample


EPM Sample I.D./

Lab Sample I.D.

Asbestos Content

POM1116-05A15-11-089-13

POM1116-05B

15-11-089-14

POM1116-05C

15-11-089-15

POM1116-06A15-11-089-16

POM1116-06B

15-11-089-17POM1116-06C15-11-089-18

POM1116-07A

15-11-089-19

POM1116-07B

15-11-089-20

POM1116-07C

15-11-089-21

POM1116-08A

15-11-089-22

POM1116-08B

15-11-089-23

POM1116-08C

15-11-089-24

POM1116-09A

15-11-089-25

POM1116-09B

15-11-089-26

POM1116-09C

15-11-089-27


Probe 11 - East side of main roof No Asbestos Detected

Probe 15 - East side of main roof No Asbestos Detected


Not Analyzed, Positive Stop



Probe 9 - West roof south end

Lightweight concrete layer

Probe 1 - West roof north side

Tar on built up roofing layer

2.5% Asbestos

Probe 3 - West roof north side

Felt paper


Detected


Probe 10 - Southeast side of main roof


Detected


Probe 12 - North wall of MER on main roof



Door frame of roof stairway bulkhead

Caulking on door frame of roof stairway bulkhead


Detected




Detected





Flashing tar on parapet wall by probe 1

Flashing tar


Detected


Flashing tar on parapet wall by probe 3


Detected


Flashing tar on skylight curbing by probe 13






Sampling Sample


EPM Sample I.D./

Lab Sample I.D.

Asbestos Content

POM1116-10A

15-11-089-28

POM1116-10B

15-11-089-29

POM1116-10C

15-11-089-30

POM1116-11A

15-11-089-31

POM1116-11B

15-11-089-32

POM1116-11C

15-11-089-33

POM1116-12A15-11-089-34

POM1116-12B

15-11-089-35

POM1116-12C

15-11-089-36POM1116-13A15-11-089-37

POM1116-13B

15-11-089-38

POM1116-13C

15-11-089-39

On metal cap of low parapet north wall

Grey caulking on metal cap of low parapet


Detected




Detected





On metal cap of low parapet south wall

Black caulking on metal cap of low parapet


Detected




Detected





Under metal cap of high parapet east wall

Black mastic under metal cap of high parapet

6.8% Asbestos





Under metal cap of low parapet south wall

Tar paper under metal cap of low parapet

1.1% Asbestos








Sampling Sample


EPM Sample I.D./

Lab Sample I.D.

Asbestos Content

POM1116-14A15-11-089-40

POM1116-14B

15-11-089-41

POM1116-14C

15-11-089-42

POM1116-15A

15-11-089-43

POM1116-15B

15-11-089-44

POM1116-15C

15-11-089-45POM1116-16A

15-11-089-46

POM1116-16B

15-11-089-47POM1116-16C

15-11-089-48

POM1116-17A

15-11-089-49

POM1116-17B

15-11-089-50

POM1116-17C15-11-089-51

Under metal cap of low parapet north wall

Tar on bricks under metal cap of low parapet

4.2% Asbestos





Metal footing on main roof south west end

Pitch pocket tar


Detected


Metal footing on main roof south west end


Detected


On metal vent pipe main roof north east



On skylight main roof west side by MER

Tar on skylights metal caps


Detected

On skylight main roof west side by parapet

3.1% Asbestos

On skylight main roof east side


On MER bulkhead wall north west corner

Tar on metal flashing


Detected

On high parapet west wall main roof


Detected

On fan unit west roof south end

1.3% Asbestos




Sampling Sample


EPM Sample I.D./

Lab Sample I.D.

Asbestos Content

POM1203-01A

15-12-068-01

POM1203-01B

15-12-068-02

POM1203-01C

15-12-068-03

POM1203-02A

15-12-068-04

POM1203-02B

15-12-068-05

POM1203-02C

15-12-068-06

Main Mechanical Room

Mechanical room floor coating


Detected


Main Mechanical RoomInconclusive, No Asbestos

Detected


Main Mechanical RoomInconclusive, No Asbestos


On low parapet inside face

White waterproofing coating on low parapet


Detected


On low parapet inside faceInconclusive, No Asbestos

Detected


On low parapet inside faceInconclusive, No Asbestos


DRAWINGS

Attachment A

Personnel Certificates and EPM Company License

New York State – Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12

Albany, NY 12240

ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE

Environmental Planning & Management, Inc. Suite 109 1983 Marcus Avenue Lake Success, NY 11042

FILE NUMBER: 99-1017 LICENSE NUMBER: 28623 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE: 10/21/2015 EXPIRATION DATE: 11/30/2016

Duly Authorized Representative – Aphrodite Socrates:

This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material.

This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor.

Eileen M. Franko, Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor

A–AsbestosHandling E‐ManagementPlanner

B–RestrictedHandler–AlliedTrades F–OperationsandMaintenance

C–AirSamplingTechnician G–Supervisor

D–Inspector H–ProjectMonitor

I–ProjectDesigner

THOMAS ZABRANSKY

A–AsbestosHandling E‐ManagementPlanner

B–RestrictedHandler–AlliedTrades F–OperationsandMaintenance

C–AirSamplingTechnician G–Supervisor

D–Inspector H–ProjectMonitor

I–ProjectDesigner

OUDENS DELICE

Attachment B

Laboratory Accreditation Documentation for Alpha Labs

NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTHWADSWORTH CENTER

Expires 12:01 AM April 01, 2016Issued April 01, 2015

CERTIFICATE OF APPROVAL FOR LABORATORY SERVICEIssued in accordance with and pursuant to section 502 Public Health Law of New York State

MR. DIMITRIOS MOLOHIDES NY Lab Id No: 11833ALPHA LABS LLC14-26 28TH AVENUELONG ISLAND CITY, NY 11102

is hereby APPROVED as an Environmental Laboratory for the categoryENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSES SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE

All approved subcategories and/or analytes are listed below:

Miscellaneous

Asbestos in Friable Material Item 198.1 of Manual

EPA 600/M4/82/020

Asbestos in Non-Friable Material-PLM Item 198.6 of Manual (NOB by PLM)

Asbestos in Non-Friable Material-TEM Item 198.4 of Manual

Asbestos-Vermiculite-Containing Material Item 198.8 of Manual

Lead in Dust Wipes EPA 7000B

Lead in Paint ASTM D3335-85A

Sample Preparation Methods

ASTM D3335-85A

ASTM E-1644-04

Serial No.: 52610Property of the New York State Department of Health. Certificates are valid only at the addressshown, must be conspicuously posted, and are printed on secure paper. Continued accreditation dependson successful ongoing participation in the Program. Consumers are urged to call (518) 485-5570 toverify the laboratory's accreditation status.

Page 1 of 1

United States Department of CommerceNational Institute of Standards and Technology

Certificate of Accreditation to ISO/IEC 17025:2005

NVLAP LAB CODE: 200691-0

Alpha Labs LLCLong Island City, NY

is accredited by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for specific services,listed on the Scope of Accreditation, for:

Asbestos Fiber AnalysisThis laboratory is accredited in accordance with the recognized International Standard ISO/IEC 17025:2005.

This accreditation demonstrates technical competence for a defined scope and the operation of a laboratory qualitymanagement system (refer to joint ISO-ILAC-IAF Communique dated January 2009).

OF

2016-01-01 through 2016-12-31

Effective Dates

\IN

For the National Volunt Accreditation Program

National VoluntaryLaboratory Accreditation Program

SCOPE OF ACCREDITATION TO ISO/IEC 17025:2005

Alpha Labs LLC14-2628 Avenue

Long Island City, NY 11102Mr. Dimitrios Molohides

Phone: 718-482-7525 Fax: 718-482-7524Email: [email protected]

http://www.alphalabsllc.com

ASBESTOS FIBER ANALYSIS NVLAP LAB CODE 200691-0

Bulk Asbestos Analysis

Code18/AOl

18/A03

DescriptionEPA 600/M4-82-020: Interim Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples

EPA 600/R-93/116: Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials

For the Nationalionsjl VoluntaryJ^boratbwAccreditation Program

Effective 2016-01-01 through 2016-12-31 Page 1 of 1

Attachment C

Asbestos Bulk Sample Laboratory Analytical Data Chain of Custody Documentation

Lab work order 15-11-089 and 15-12-068

14-26 28th Avenue Long Island City, NY 11102

Tel.: (718) 482-7525 Fax: (718) 482-7524 www.alphalabsllc.com

BULK SAMPLE ANALYSIS REPORTCLIENT: Environmental Planning & Management Inc., 1983 Marcus Avenue, Suite 109, Lake Success NY 11042BUILDING ADDRESS: FIT - Pomerantz building D-Roof, 300 Seventh Avenue, New York CityPROJECT: 14018-03

Client Sample ID#Lab Sample ID#

POM1116-01A15-11-089-01

POM1116-01B15-11-089-02

POM1116-01C15-11-089-03

POM1116-02A15-11-089-04

POM1116-02B15-11-089-05

POM1116-02C15-11-089-06

POM1116-03A15-11-089-07

POM1116-03B15-11-089-08

POM1116-03C15-11-089-09

POM1116-04A15-11-089-10

POM1116-04B15-11-089-11

POM1116-04C15-11-089-12

SampleDescription

Tar on concrete roofdecking



Roofing base sheet

Roofing base sheet

Roofing base sheet

Foamglass blackinsulation board






SampleLocation

Probe 5 -West roof center

Probe 1 5 -East side of main roof

Probe 18-MER bulkhead roofSouth sideProbe 4 -West roof center

Probe 14-East side of main roof

Probe 20 -MER bulkhead roofcenterProbe 1 -West roof North side



Probe 5 -West roof center

Probe 16-Main roof South EastsideProbe 18-MER bulkhead roofSouth side

Appearance

BlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOB

GRAVIMETRIC PREPARATION% AshedOrganicComponent

91.9

93.0

98.0

86.1

96.0

91.1

51.6

77.4

57.6

95.6

98.7

98.3

% AcidSolubleInorganicComponent

2.4

5.3

0.9

4.2

2.3

4.1

4.7

2.3

3.1

2.6

0.2

0.5

% AcidInsolubleInorganicComponent

5.7

1.7

1.1

9.7

1.7

4.8

43.7

20.3

39.3

1.9

1.1

1.2

PLM% EstimatedNon-AsbestosFibrousMaterial

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

% Non-FibrousMatrixMaterial

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

1 00%

100%

100%

100%

1 00%

100%

ASBESTOS% & Type

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

TEMASBESTOS% & Type

NAD

NAD

Analysis notrequested by

client

NAD

NAD


client

NAD

NAD


client

NAD

NAD


client

Page 1 of 5


Tei.: (718) 482-7525 Fax: (718) 482-7524 www.alphalabsllc.com



POM1116-05A15-11-089-13

POM1116-05B15-11-089-14

POM1116-05C15-11-089-15

POM1116-06A15-11-089-16

POM1116-06B15-11-089-17

POM1116-06C15-11-089-18

POM1116-07A15-11-089-19

POM1116-07B15-11-089-20

POM1116-07C15-11-089-21

POM1116-08A15-11-089-22

POM1116-08B15-11-089-23

POM1116-08C15-11-089-24

SampleDescription

Tar on built uproofing layer



Light weightconcrete layer

Lightweightconcrete layer

Lightweightconcrete layer

Felt paper

Felt paper

Felt paper

Caulking on doorframe of roofstairway bulkheadCaulking on doorframe of roofstairway bulkheadCaulking on doorframe of roofstairway bulkhead

SampleLocation

Probe 1 -West roof North side



Probe 9 -West roof South end



Probe 3 -West roof North side

Probe 1 0 -Main roof South EastendProbe 12-Main roof at North WallofMERDoor frame of roofstairway bulkhead

Door frame of roofstairway bulkhead

Door frame of roofstairway bulkhead

Appearance

BlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBeigeHomogeneousFriableBeigeHomogeneousFriableBeigeHomogeneousFriableBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBL. GreyHomogeneousNOBL. GreyHomogeneousNOBL. GreyHomogeneousNOB


85.3

96.7

60.0


2.7

2.1

6.4


12.0

1.2

33.6

Not Applicable

Not Applicable

Not Applicable

75.8

75.4

68.1

45.9

47.6

51.5

18.6

9.8

24.1

38.2

23.9

24.4

5.6

14.8

7.8

15.9

28.5

24.2


0%

7.4% VERM

6.9% VERM

6.7% VERM

5% CELL50% FBGL

5% CELL50% FBGL

5% CELL50% FBGL

0%

0%

0%


97.5%

92.6%

93.1%

93.3%

45%

45%

45%

100%

100%

100%

ASBESTOS% & Type

2.5% CH

NA/PS

NA/PS

NAD

NAD

NAD

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

TEMASBESTOS% & Type

NAD

NAD


client

NAD

NAD


client

Page 2 of 5


Tel.: (718) 482-7525 Fax:(718)482-7524 www.aiphalabsHc.com



POM1116-G9A15-11-089-25

POM1116-09B15-11-089-26

POM1116-09C15-11-089-27

POM 111 6-1 OA15-11-089-28

POM1116-10B15-11-089-29

POM1116-10C15-11-089-30

POM1116-11A15-11-089-31

POM1116-11B15-11-089-32

POM1 116-1 1C15-11-089-33

POM1116-12A15-11-089-34

POM1 116-12815-11-089-35

POM1116-12C15-11-089-36

SampleDescription

Flashing tar

Flashing tar

Flashing tar

Grey caulking on metalcap of low parapet



Black caulking on metalcap of low parapet



Black mastic undermetal cap of highparapetBlack mastic undermetal cap of highparapetBlack mastic undermetal cap of highparapet

SampleLocation

Flashing tar onparapet wall byProbe 1Flashing tar onparapet wall byProbe 3Flashing tar onskylight curbing byProbe 13On metal cap oflow parapet NorthwallOn metal cap oflow parapet NorthwallOn metal cap oflow parapet NorthwallOn metal cap oflow parapet SouthwallOn metal cap oflow parapet SouthwallOn metal cap oflow parapet SouthwallUnder metal cap ofhigh parapet EastwallUnder metal cap ofhigh parapet EastwallUnder metal cap ofhigh parapet Eastwall

Appearance

BlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBTanHomogeneousNOBGreyHomogeneousNOBD. GreyHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOB


94.5

98.2

98.4

58.4

70.4

69.8

33.8

53.7

52.9

53.6

53.4

51.5


4.3

0.7

0.3

30.1

23.6

26.0

64.5

43.4

45.6

14.1

12.5

12.7


1.2

1.2

1.3

11.5

5.9

4.2

1.7

2.9

1.5

32.3

34.1

35.9


0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%


100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

93.2%

ASBESTOS% & Type

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADinconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

6.8% CH

NA/PS

NA/PS

TEMASBESTOS% & Type

NAD

NAD


client

NAD

NAD


client

NAD

NAD


client

Page 3 of 5


Tel.: (718)482-7525 Fax: {718)482-7524 www.alphalabsllc.com



POM1116-13A15-11-089-37

POM1116-13B15-11-089-38

POM1116-13C15-11-089-39

POM1116-14A15-11-089-40

POM1116-14B15-11-089-41

POM1116-14C15-11-089-42

POM1116-15A15-11-089-43

POM1116-15B15-11-089-44

POM1116-15C15-11-089-45

POM1116-16A15-11-089-46

POM1116-16B15-11-089-47

POM1116-16C15-11-089-48

SampleDescription

Tar paper under metalcap of low parapet

Tar paper under metalcap of low pa rape!

Tar paper under metalcap of low para pet

Tar on bricks undermetal cap of low parapet



Pitch pocket tar

Pitch pocket tar

Pitch pocket tar

Tar on skylights metalcaps



SampleLocation

Under metal cap oflow parapet SouthwallUnder metal cap oflow parapet SouthwallUnder metal cap oflow parapet SouthwallUnder metal cap oflow parapet NorthwallUnder metal cap oflow parapet NorthwallUnder metal cap oflow parapet NorthwallMetal footing onmain roof SouthWest endMetal footing onmain roof SouthWest endOn metal vent pipemain roof NorthEastOn skylight mainroof West side byMEROn skylight mainroof West side byparapetOn skylight mainroof East side

Appearance

BlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOB


66.5

70.1

65.5

70.9

68.8

72.7

87.2

89.4

41.8

70.4

76.2

37.9


28.2

26.4

30.6

9.2

12.5

17.1

7.5

8.2

26.0

27.0

8.3

10.7


5.3

3.5

3.9

20.0

18.7

10.1

5.3

2.4

32.2

2.6

15.5

51.4


20% CELL

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%


98.9%

95.8%

100%

1 00%

100%

100%

96.9%

ASBESTOS% & Type

1.1%CH

NA/PS

NA/PS

4.2% CH

NA/PS

NA/PS

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADinconclusive

NADInconclusive

3.1%CH

NA/PS

TEMASBESTOS% & Type

NAD

NAD


client

Page 4 of 5


Tel: (718)482-7525 Fax: (718)482-7524 www.alphatabsllc.com



POM1116-17A15-11-089-49

POM1116-17B15-11-089-50

POM1116-17C15-11-089-51

SampleDescription




SampleLocation

On MER bulkheadwall North WestcornerOn high parapetWest wall main roof

On fan unit Westroof South end

Appearance

BlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOBBlackHomogeneousNOB


73.2

41.7

80.0


21.5

50.2

12.3


5.3

8.2

7.7


0%

0%

0%


100%

100%

98.7%

ASBESTOS% & Type

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

1.3%CH

TEMASBESTOS% & Type

Date Received: 11/19/15Date of PLM Analysis: 11/20/15Date of TEM Analysis: 11/20/15Date of Report: 11/23/15

Analyst: C? b U

PLM Analyst: E. GiannakopoulouTEM Analyst: A. Ansari

£XA QC Review/Date:E. Giannakopoulou D. Molohides, Lab Director

NAD= No Asbestos Detected; NA/PS = Not Analyzed / Positive Stop; Trace = < 1%, CH = Chrysotile, AMO = Amosite, CRO = Crocidolite, ANTH = Anthophyllite,TRE = Tremolite, ACT = Actinolite, FBGL = Fiberglass, CELL - Cellulose, VERM=Vermiculite. Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) analysis of samples is performedby Method EPA 600/M4-82-020 and ELAP PLM Analysis Protocol 198.1 (friable sample, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite) andprotocol 198.6 (NOB samples), Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) analysis of samples is performed by Method ELAP TEM Analysis Protocol 198.4.Analytical equipments: Stereobinocular microscopes: Professional Bin (PM #1), Carlsan (Ser# 011418); Polarized Light Microscopes: Olympus BH-2 (Ser #:214335), Olympus BH-2 (Ser #: 236532). PLM is not consistently reliable in d=etecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically boundmaterials. Quantitative transmission electron microscopy is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treatedas non-asbestos-containing. Samples will be stored for sixty (60) days and then returned to the client upon request. The results relate only to the items calibratedor tested. This report may not be reproduced, except in full, without the written approval of Alpha Labs LLC. The report must not be used by the client to claimendorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the US Government. The liability of Alpha Labs LLC with respect to the services charged shall in no event exceed theamount of the invoice. (April 1, 2013)

NYS-DOH ELAP #11833 NVLAP Lab Code: 200691-0

Page 5 of 5

BULK SAMPLE FORM PAGE OF

N. ENVIRONMENTAL

^^ PLANNING &

£ M ^*^ MANAGicmenrTTTT fC.

1983 Marcus Avenue, Suite 109 RESULTS NEEDED^ 72 \\r. T^

Lake Success, New York 11042 SEÔALL-REÛLTS BY EMAIL, ATTENTION OF:

(516)328-1194 Fax (516) 328-1381 [email protected] and [email protected] INFORMATION FOLLOW-UP ALL FAXES WITH HARDCOPY BY MAIL TO EPM

CLIENT :

EPM#:

Location:

Fashion Institute of Technology SHIPPED BY: Hand delivered

14018-03 DATE: 11/19/2015 LABORATORY NOTE : Analyze by layer via PLM with positive stop.Pomerantz Building D - ROOF If all samples negative by PLM and an NOB, analyze 1st two samples only via300 Seventh Avenue, New York City TEM with positive stop, (example: A.1 , B.1 . C.1 then A.2, B.2, C.2)

SAMPLE NUMBER

POM1 116-01 A

POM1 116-01 B

POM1 116-01

POM1 116-02

POM1 116-02

POM1116-02

POM1116-03

POM1116-03

POM1 116-03

POM1116-04

POM1116-04

POM1116-04

POM1116-05

POM1116-05

POM1116-05

POM1 116-06

POM1116-06

POM1 116-06

cA

B

C

A

B

C

A

B

C

A

B

C

A

B

C

DATE

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

SAMPLE LOCATION

Probe 5 - West Roof Center

Probe 15 - East Side of Main Roof

Probe 18 - MER Bulkhead Roof South Side



Probe 20 - MER Bulkhead Roof Center

Probe 1 - West Roof North Side

Probe 1 1 - East Side of Main Roof



Probe 16 - Main Roof South East Side

Probe 18 - MER Bulkhead Roof South Side




Probe 9 - West Roof South End



MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

Tar on concrete roof decking

Roofing base sheet

Foamglass black insulation board


Tar on built up roofing layer

Light weight concrete layer

Sa/nple£lfftlinrr({fihmrnt Signature /pate / Time;

~ LLab.Receipt Signature / Date / Time:


v. ENVIRONMENTAL

\ tp ^\

£ M \ MANAQ JEMENT, /ft (C.

1983 Marcus Avenue, Suite 109 RESULTS NEEDE&: 72 hr.JTAT

Lake Success, New York 1 1042 SENDNALL-*ESULTS BY EMAIL, ATTENTION OF:

(518) 328- 1194 Fax (516) 328-1381 [email protected] and [email protected] INFORMATION FOLLOW-UP ALL FAXES WITH HARDCOPY BY MAIL TO EPM

CLIENT :

EPM#:

Location:


14018-03 DATE : 11/19/2015 LABORATORY NOTE : Analyze by layer via PLM with positive stop.Pomerantz Building D - ROOF if all samples negative by PLM and an NOB, analyze 1st two samples only via300 Seventh Avenue, New York City TEM with positive Stop.

SAMPLE NUMBER

POM 111 6-07

POM1 116-07

POM1 116-07

POM1 116-08

POM1 116-08

POM1116-08

A

B

C

A

B

C

POM1116-09 A

POM1116-09 B

POM 11 16-09 C

POM1116-10 A

POM1116-10 B

POM1116-10C

POM11 16-11 A

POM1116-11 B

POM1 116-11 C

POM1 116-12 A

POM1 116-12 B

POM1116-12C

DATE

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/18/2015

11/18/2015

11/18/2015

SAMPLE LOCATION


Probe 10 - Main Roof South East End

Probe 12 - Main Roof at North Wall of MER




Flashing Tar on parapet wall by Probe 1

Flashing Tar on parapet wall by Probe 3

Flashing Tar on skylight curbing by Probe 13










example: A.1, B.1, C.1 then A.2, B.2, C.2)


Felt Paper

Caulking on door frame of roof stairway bulkhead

Flashing Tar

Grey Caulking on metal cap of low parapet

Black Caulking on metal cap of low parapet

Black Mastic under metal cap of high parapet

ent Signature /

dDate/If/Tie:

y/7//5Lab Receipt Signature / Date I Time:


\^ ENVIRONMENTAL^^\P ^\M \ MANAQJawENTr/J

[

(C.

1983 Marcus Avenue, Suite 109

Lake Success, New York 11042

(516)328-1194 Fax (516) 328-1381

PROJECT INFORMATIONCLIENT : Fashion Institute of Technology

EPM#: 14018-03 DATE: 11/19/2015

Location: Pomerantz Building D • ROOF300 Seventh Avenue, New York City

SAMPLE NUMBER

POM1116-13

POM1116-13

POM11 16-13

POM1 116-14

POM1 116-14

POM1 116-14

POM1 116-15

POM1 116-15

POM1 116-15

A

B

C

A

B

C

A

B

C

POM1116-16 A

POM1 116-16 B

POM1116-16 C

POM1 116-17

POM1116-17

POM1 116-17

A

B

C

DATE

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

11/17/2015

11/16/2015

RESULTS NEEDED 7# hf.^"ATSENbÂUJtEfeULTS BY EMAIL, ATTENTION OF:

[email protected] and [email protected]

FOLLOW-UP ALL FAXES WITH HARDCOPY BY MAIL TO EPM

SHIPPED BY: Hand deliveredLABORATORY NOTE : AIf all samples negative b>TEM with positive stop.

SAMPLE LOCATION







Metal Footing on Main Roof South West End

Metal Footing on Main Roof South West End

On Metal Vent Pipe Main Roof North East

On Skylight Main Roof West Side by MER

On Skylight Main Roof West Side by parapet

On Skylight Main Roof East Side

On MER Bulkhead Wall North West Corner

On High Parapet West Wall Main Roof

On Fan Unit West Roof South End

nalyze by layer via PLM with positive stop,r PLM and an NOB, analyze 1st two samples only viaexample: A.1, B.1, C.1 then A.2, B.2, C.2)


Tar Paper under metal cap of low parapet

Tar on bricks under metal cap of low parapet

Pitch Pocket Tar

Tar on skylights metal caps


Sampler's Relinqui$hme/it Signature /ate / Time:ture /pat

I7/&I i

Lab Receipt Signature / Date / Time:

Illli/lr

14-26 28th Avenue

Tel.: (718) 482-7525 Fax: (718) 482-7524

Long Island City, NY 11102

www.alphalabsllc.com

BULK SAMPLE ANALYSIS REPORTCLIENT: Environmental Planning & Management Inc., 1983 Marcus Avenue, Suite 109, Lake Success NY 11042BUILDING ADDRESS: FIT - Pomerantz Roof - 300 Seventh Avenue, New York CityPROJECT: 14018-03

Client SampleID#Lab Sample ID#

Pom1 203-01 A15-12-068-01

Pom1 203-01 B15-12-068-02

Pom1 203-01 C15-12-068-03

Pom1203-02A15-12-068-04

Pom1203-02B15-12-068-05

Pom1203-02C15-12-068-06

SampleDescription

White waterproofingcoating on lowparapetWhite waterproofingcoating on lowparapetWhite waterproofingcoating on lowparapetMechanical roomcoating

Mechanical roomcoating

Mechanical roomcoating

SampleLocation

Pomerantz roof lowparapet



Pomerantz roof mainmechanical room



Appearance

Off WhiteHomogeneousNOBOff WhiteHomogeneousNOBOff WhiteHomogeneousNOBOff White/GreyHomogeneousNOBOff White/GreyHomogeneousNOBOff White/GreyHomogeneousNOB


22.3

23.2

26.7

39.6

39.6

42.3

f%AcidSolubleInorganicComponent

42.9

44.9

55.5

35.2

34.7

28.3


34.8

31.9

17.9

25.2

25.7

29.4


0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%


100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

ASBESTOS% & Type

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

NADInconclusive

TEMASBESTOS% & Type

NAD

NAD


client

NAD

NAD


client

Page 1 of 2

14-26 28th Avenue

Tel.: (718) 482-7525 Fax: (718) 482-7524

Long Island City, NY 11102

www.alphalabsllc.com

BULK SAMPLE ANALYSIS REPORTCLIENT: Environmental Planning & Management Inc., 1983 Marcus Avenue, Suite 109, Lake Success NY 11042BUILDING ADDRESS: FIT - Pomerantz Roof - 300 Seventh Avenue, New York CityPROJECT: 14018-03

Date Received: 12/15/15Date of PLM Analysis: 12/16/15Date of TEM Analysis: 12/16/15Date of Report: 12/17/15

Analyst:

PLM Analyst: L. TchorzewskiTEM Analyst: L. Tchorzewski

QC Review / Date:/D. Molohides, Lab Director

NAD= No Asbestos Detected; NA/PS = Not Analyzed / Positive Stop; Trace = < 1%, CH = Chrysotile, AMO = Amosite, CRO = Crocidolite, ANTH = Anthophyllite,TRE = Tremolite, ACT = Actinolite, FBGL = Fiberglass, CELL = Cellulose, VERM=Vermiculite. Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) analysis of samples is performedby Method EPA 600/M4-82-020 and ELAP PLM Analysis Protocol 198.1 (friable sample, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite) andprotocol 198.6 (NOB samples), Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) analysis of samples is performed by Method ELAP TEM Analysis Protocol 198.4.Analytical equipments: Stereobinocular microscopes: Professional Bin (PM #1), Carlsan (Ser# 011418); Polarized Light Microscopes: Olympus BH-2 (Ser #:214335), Olympus BH-2 (Ser #: 236532). PLM is not consistently reliable in d=etecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically boundmaterials. Quantitative transmission electron microscopy is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treatedas non-asbestos-containing. Samples will be stored for sixty (60) days and then returned to the client upon request. The results relate only to the items calibratedor tested. This report may not be reproduced, except in full, without the written approval of Alpha Labs LLC. The report must not be used by the client to claimendorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the US Government. The liability of Alpha Labs LLC with respect to the services charged shall in no event exceed theamount of the invoice. (April 1, 2013)

NYS-DOH ELAP #11833 NVLAP Lab Code: 200691-0

Page 2 of 2


-v. ENVIRONMENTAL

^x. PLANNING IP ^v

EM X. MANAi iEMENT, If fC.

1983 Marcus Avenue, Suite 109 RESULTS NEEDED1 72 hf. TAT ^/

Lake Success, N*w York 11042 SErtQALLÊStttTS BY EMAIL, ATTENTION OF:

(516) 328- 1194 Fax (516) 328-1381 [email protected] and [email protected] INFORMATION FOLLOW-UP ALL FAXES WITH HARDCOPY BY MAIL TO EPM

CLIENT :

EPM#:

Location:


14018-03 DATE: 12/14/2015 LABORATORY NOTE : Analyze by layer via PLM with positive stop.Pomerantz Roof if all samples negative by PLM and an NOB, analyze 1st two samples only via300 Seventh Avenue, New York City TEM with positive Stop.

SAMPLE NUMBER

Pom1 203-01

Pom1 203-01

Pom 1203-01

Pom 1203-02

Pom 1203-02

Pom1 203-02

A

B

C

A

B

C

DATE

12/3/2015

12/3/2015

SAMPLE LOCATION

Pomerantz roof low parapetPomerantz roof low parapetPomerantz roof low parapetPomerantz roof main mechanical roomPomerantz roof main mechanical roomPomerantz roof main mechanical room

example: A.1, B.1, C.1 then A.2, B.2, C.2)


White waterproofing coating on low parapet

Mechanical room floor coating

Sampler's >ntSio )/Date/Time: Lafjj Receipt Sîgnature / Date / Time:

Attachment D

Photographs of Identified and Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials

Asbestos Survey Report - Photos

LOCATION: FIT - Fashion Institute of Technology Fred Pomerantz Art & Design Center - (Building D) DATE: November 16, 2015

Photo No. A1

Photo No. A2

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof. Description: Asbestos Built Up Roofing Layer (middle layer of roofing system) under the light weight concrete fill layer.

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof. Description: Asbestos Built Up Roofing Layer located between light weight concrete and deteriorated black insulation board.

E MP

E N V I R O N M E N T A LP L A N N I N G &

M A N A G E M E N T , I N C.


LOCATION: FIT - Fashion Institute of Technology Fred Pomerantz Art & Design Center – (Building D) DATE: November 16, 2015

Photo No. A3

Photo No. A4

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof Extension. Description: Asbestos Built Up Roofing Layer (middle layer of roofing system) below the light weight concrete fill layer.

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof Extension. Description: Tar on parapet brick is negative for asbestos.

E MP





Photo No. A5

Photo No. A6

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof Extension. Description: Roof Flashing along low parapet. Flashing Tar is negative for asbestos.

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof Extension. Description: Metal Flashing extending within the brick of the low parapet. Flashing Tar is negative for asbestos.

E MP





Photo No. A7

Photo No. A8

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof Extension. Description: Asbestos Built Up Roofing Layer (middle layer of roof system) under the light weight concrete layer.

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof High Parapet. Description: Asbestos Tar on concrete under metal cap of high parapet wall.

E MP





Photo No. A9

Photo

No. A10 Location: Pomerantz Building Roof Extension low parapet wall. Description: Tar Paper (contains asbestos) on top of brick under metal cap of low parapet wall.

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof Extension low parapet wall. Description: Asbestos Tar on top of brick under metal cap of low parapet wall.

E MP





Photo

No. A11

Photo

No.A12 Location: Pomerantz Building Main Roof mechanical room bulkhead base of wall. Description: Asbestos Tar on metal flashing on mechanical room bulkhead wall.

Location: Pomerantz Building Main Roof Skylights. Description: Asbestos Tar on skylights metal caps.

E MP





Photo

No. A13

Photo

No.A14 Location: Pomerantz Building Main Roof Mechanical Room base of bulkhead wall. Description: Roof Flashing at base of mechanical room bulkhead wall. Flashing Tar is negative for asbestos.

Location: Pomerantz Building Roof Extension. Description: Asbestos Tar on base of fan unit.

E MP





100% CD

WRL #15073.00 FORMS


DOCUMENT 006000 - FORMS

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The following form of the General Conditions shall be used for Project:

1. Requirements as stipulated in Owner's document bound within this Document.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE FORMS

A. Preconstruction Forms:

1. Form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Bond: Requirements as stipulated in

Owner’s document bound within this Document.

B. Information and Modification Forms:

1. Form for Request for Interpretation (RFI): Bound within this Document.

C. Payment Forms:

1. Requirements as stipulated in Owner’s document bound within this Document.

END OF DOCUMENT 006000



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 SUMMARY


SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Access to site.

4. Indoor Air Quality during construction.

5. Coordination with occupants.

6. Work restrictions.

7. Specification and drawing conventions.

8. Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents

9. Miscellaneous provisions.

a. Request for Interpretation.

b. Proposal Request.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

Project Identification: Fashion Institute of Technology

Fred P. Pomerantz Art and Design Center Roof Renovation

340 8th Avenue

New York, NY 10001

Owner: Fashion Institute of Technology (FIT)

Owner’s Representative: Allen King

Tel: 212-219-4424

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Scope of Work for this Project consists of the following:

1. Removal of existing roofing membranes, insulation, fills, and surfacing materials, down

to the surface of the roof decks and adjoining vertical flashing surfaces; and, removal of

most exposed sheet metal flashings, as indicated on the drawings.

2. Installation of torch-applied base sheet (except on Tower’s wood deck) and maintenance

of it for temporary watertightness until removals are complete in each distinct roof area.



100% CD



3. Installation of new roofing system and overburden components, including insulation,

cover board, membrane, flashings and strippings, drainage mat, leak detection system,

and other related components and sub-systems specified herein and on the drawings.

4. Interior finish work, plumbing work, mechanical work, electrical work, fire alarm work,

and other work specified herein and indicated on the drawings.

B. Types of Contracts:

1. Project will be constructed under coordinated, concurrent multiple contracts. Contracts

for this Project include the following:

a. Prime Contract, including electrical and general trades and mechanical.

C. Prime Contractor: Work in the Prime Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Roofing work.

2. General trades work.

3. Interior finish work.

4. Mechanical work.

5. Electrical work.

6. Fire Alarm work.

7. Remaining work not identified as work under other contracts.

8. Selective demolition and cutting and patching not identified as work under other

contracts.

D. Temporary facilities and controls in the General Trades Contract include, but are not limited to,

the following:

1. Temporary facilities and controls that are not otherwise specifically assigned to the

Electrical Contract.

2. Unpiped temporary toilet fixtures (if Owner’s facilities are not available for use), wash

facilities, and drinking water facilities, including disposable supplies.

3. General waste disposal facilities.

4. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.

5. Security enclosure and lockup.

6. Environmental protection.

7. Restoration of Owner's existing facilities used as temporary facilities.

8. Staging and scaffolding.

9. Temporary heating, cooling and ventilation, including temporary connections.

10. Indoor air quality measures specified in Article 1.10.

1.5 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Prime Contractor coordination activities of Project include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Provide overall coordination of the Work, including that of owner direct purchase

contracts.

2. Coordinate compliance with FIT’s fire safety requirements during construction.

3. Coordinate shared access to workspaces.

4. Coordinate product selections for compatibility.

5. Provide overall coordination of temporary facilities and controls.

6. Coordinate, schedule, and approve interruptions of permanent and temporary utilities,

including those necessary to make connections for temporary services.



100% CD



7. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by each

Contract.

8. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of the Work. Include the following:

a. Initial Coordination Meeting: At earliest possible date, arrange and conduct a

meeting with contractors for sequencing and coordinating the Work; negotiate

reasonable adjustments to schedules.

b. Prepare a combined contractors' construction schedule for entire Project. Base

schedule on preliminary construction schedule. Secure time commitments for

performing critical construction activities from contractors. Show activities of

each contract on a separate sheet. Prepare a simplified summary sheet indicating

combined construction activities of contracts.

1) Submit schedules for approval.

2) Distribute copies of approved schedules to contractors.

9. Provide photographic documentation.

10. Provide quality-assurance and quality-control services.

11. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and coordinate

schedule of tests and inspections.

12. Provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures

affected by construction.

13. Provide progress cleaning of common areas and coordinate progress cleaning of areas or

pieces of equipment where more than one contractor has worked.

14. Coordinate cutting and patching.

15. Coordinate protection of the Work.

16. Coordinate firestopping.

17. Coordinate completion of interrelated punch list items.

18. Coordinate preparation of Project record documents if information from more than one

contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to form one

combined record.

19. Print and submit record documents if installations by more than one contractor are

indicated on the same contract drawing or shop drawing.

20. Collect record Specification Sections from contractors, collate Sections into numeric

order, and submit complete set.

21. Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance manuals if information from more

than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to form

one combined record.

22. Schedule and sequence electrical activities.

23. Coordinate sharing access to workspaces by electrical contractors.

24. Coordinate integration of electrical work into limited spaces.

25. Coordinate protection of electrical contractors' work.

26. Coordinate selective demolition, cutting and patching for electrical work.

27. Prepare electrical coordination drawings.

28. Coordinate tests and inspections for electrical work.

29. Coordinate electrical temporary services and facilities.

B. Each Contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and

entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of the Work. Each Contractor shall coordinate

its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for

proper installation, connection, and operation.



100% CD



1. Unless otherwise indicated, the work described in this Section for each contract shall be

complete systems and assemblies, including products, components, accessories, and

installation required by the Contract Documents.

2. Blocking, backing panels, sleeves, and metal fabrication supports for the work of each

contract shall be the work of each contract for its own work.

3. Furnishing of access panels for the work of each contract shall be the work of each

contract for its own work. Installation of access panels shall be the work of each contract

for its own work.

4. Painting for the work of each contract shall be the work of the General Construction

Contract.

5. Cutting and Patching: Provided under each contract for its own work.

6. Through-penetration firestopping for the work of each contract shall be provided by each

contract for its own work.

C. Temporary facilities and controls in the Prime Contractors Contract include, but are not limited

to, the following:

1. Installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of each temporary facility necessary for

its own normal construction activity, and costs and use charges associated with each

facility, except as otherwise provided for in this Section.

2. Plug-in electric power cords and extension cords, supplementary plug-in task lighting,

and special lighting necessary exclusively for its own activities.

3. Temporary enclosures for its own construction activities.

4. Waste disposal facilities, including collection and legal disposal of its own hazardous,

dangerous, unsanitary, or other harmful waste materials.

5. Progress cleaning of work areas affected by its operations on a daily basis.

6. Secure lockup of its own tools, materials, and equipment.

7. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities necessary exclusively for its

own construction activities.

8. FIT’s fire safety requirements during construction.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. Prime Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated

on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb

portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency

vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by

construction operations.



100% CD



D. Connections to Electrical Equipment and Systems: Contractor is not permitted to tie into

electrical equipment or systems until the FIT Facilities Management Department has reviewed

and approved the connection.

1. Submit written procedures to the Owner’s Representative, detailing the proposed

connection Work.

2. After procedures have been approved, notify the Owner’s Representative at least three

working days prior to the connection Work so that arrangements can be made to have a

FIT Facilities Management Department Representative witness the Work.

1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,

with the exception of areas where work is being performed. Cooperate with Owner during

construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so

as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used

facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's

operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to

occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to

Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with

completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not

constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of

the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited

Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully

operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On

occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving

occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service

for occupied portions of Work.

1.8 INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the

dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time

frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to

be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.

3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.

4. Other dust-control measures.



100% CD



B. Filter Replacement: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use

during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and

remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system.

C. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on

each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending

sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints.

Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with

not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot

mats in vestibule.

2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security

locks where openings are required.

3. Protect air-handling equipment.

4. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: As indicated in Owner’s General Requirements.

1. Unless noted otherwise, Work is to be performed between the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 6:00

p.m., Monday through Friday, legal and union holidays excluded.

2. Major mobilization is to be performed at night, between the hours of 10:00 p.m. to 6:00

a.m., Monday through Friday.

3. All work conducted which causes significant noise that is considered a disturbance to the

school shall be conducted, at contractor’s expense, during the time period between 10:00

p.m. and 6:00 a.m. Work considered to be a disturbance or a disruption to the school

includes but is not necessarily limited to roof materials loading, roofing, removals,

scarification, and mechanical fastening operations.

4. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: As approved in writing by Owner with not less than 72

hours’ notice. Shutdowns shall be conducted, at contractor’s expense, during the time

period between 10:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.

5. Hours for Core Drilling: As approved in writing by Owner with not less than 72 hours

notice. Core drilling shall be conducted, at Contractor’s expense, during the time period

between 10:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.

6. 24 Hour Access: The Owner will make the work site available as needed, including three

shifts (24 hour access) as coordinated and approved in writing by Owner. All additional

costs associated with work outside of normal business working hours shall be accounted

for in the Contractor’s bid.

7. Weekend Hours: As approved in writing by Owner.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated:



100% CD



1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and

vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site

is not permitted.

G. Employee Identification: Comply with the Facility’s Visitor Identification Policy. A copy of

the current policy will be distributed at the initial job meeting.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to

identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of

the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

1.11 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution

and completion of the work by the Contractor. The contract Documents are complementary,

and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the

Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and

reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.



100% CD



B. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document

not clarified by Addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in

accordance with the Architect's interpretation.

C. If an item is shown on the Drawings but not specified, the Contractor shall provide the item of

the same quality as similar items specified, as determined by the Architect. If an item is

specified but not shown on the Drawings, it shall be located as directed by the Architect.

D. The Drawings are indications of the design intent as well as specific instructions. The "details"

included on Drawings show the intent of all similar areas. If questions arise about the

construction of an area not specifically detailed, consult with the Architect who will provide

further "details" and instructions. Such further documentation, if consistent with the Contract

Documents, shall not alter the Contract Sum.

E. If the Contractor, in the course of construction, finds any conflict, error, or discrepancy on or

between the Drawings and Specifications or any of the related Contract Documents, such

conflict, error, or discrepancy shall be immediately referred to the Architect, in writing.

Architect shall issue an interpretation, in writing, to the Contractor within (10) days after receipt

of the written request. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor as a result of

an interpretation of the Contract Documents.

1.12 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for

Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Request for Interpretation (RFI):

1. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or

interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in

the form bound in the Project Manual.

2. Architect’s Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and

respond. Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received

by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

3. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI

number. Submit log weekly.

4. On receipt of Architect’s action, update RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI

response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five days if

contractor disagrees with response.

C. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop

work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 10 days, when not otherwise specified, after

receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the

Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.



100% CD



a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data

to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting

an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Use form acceptable to Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 UNIT PRICES


SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount incorporated into the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the

Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of

the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope

of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or

decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,

applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires

establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified

in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use

of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an

independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections

referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 UNIT PRICES



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price No. 01:

1. Description: Furnish and install an Additional Slope Assembly, comprising a 4-foot x 4-

foot tapered insulation board, 1-1/2 inch – 1/2 inch thickness, and a 1-foot x 4 foot

tapered edge strip, 1/2 inch x 0 inch, installed in insulation adhesive to the base sheet,

where directed by the Owner’s Representative.

2. Unit of Measurement: Per Additional Slope Assembly.

3. Quantity Allowance: 50 Additional Slope Assemblies.

B. Unit Price No. 02:

1. Description: Repoint damaged brick joints

2. Unit of Measurement: Per lineal foot.

3. Quantity Allowance: 500 lineal feet.

C. Unit Price No. 03:

1. Description: Replace damaged plywood decking.

2. Unit of Measurement: Per square foot per layer.

3. Quantity Allowance: 300 square feet.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 ALTERNATES


SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined

in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the

Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be

completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described

in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the

Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work

of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part

of alternate.

B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work

described under each alternate.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 ALTERNATES



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 01

1. Base Bid: Remove existing metal coping ("cap" per Section 028200), remove asbestos

containing materials under metal coping, and install new manufactured coping system, at

Main Roof high parapet as indicated in Drawings.

2. Alternate: Perform Main Roof high parapet Base Bid work also at Connecting Wing high

parapets as indicated in Drawings.

a. Connecting Wing west parapet has no material requiring removal.

b. Remove and replace existing concrete copings cracked, broken, or otherwise

significantly damaged as a result of the removals work.

c. Take all necessary precautions to protect from damage the roofing assembly,

plantings, brickwork, and all other roofing and parapet components not included in

the specified work. Remove and replace in kind all such components damaged as a

result of the work.

B. Alternate No. 02:

1. Base Bid: Perform Base Bid work at Main Roof as indicated on Drawings.

2. Alternate: Perform work at Main Roof high parapet also at Connecting Wing east parapet

and Building E parapets; also install new coping assembly at Connecting Wing west

parapet.

C. Alternate No. 03:

1. Base Bid: Perform Base Bid work at Mechanical Equipment Room as indicated in

Specification 071800 Traffic Coatings.

2. Alternate: Flash penetrations through floor of Mechanical Equipment Room; do not

install Traffic Coating in Mechanical Equipment Room.


Page 1 of 1

R E Q U E S T F O R I N T E R P R E T A T I O N

DATE: RFI NO.:

INITIATED BY:

DIRECTED TO:

RE:

SUBJECT:

SIGNED:

REPLY:

The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the supplemental information or clarifications included in the Reply and issued in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with the Reply indicates your acknowledgment that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Where the Reply requires a change to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, submit a detailed breakdown indicating the increased sum or time required. Proceed with the Reply ONLY when the Owner and the Architect give written authorization for the change to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. REPLY ISSUED BY:

FIRM: DATE:

Client:

Project:

Comm. No.:

File No.:



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality

control.

B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results

are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual

Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract

Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services

required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by

provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further

described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in

nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and

having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of

the Work and for completed Work.

C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,

including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.



100% CD



1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or

that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding

temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to

verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities

of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface

between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation

tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish

the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope constructed on-site as

part of permanent construction, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and

subassemblies.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before

products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance

with specified criteria.

F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing

laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to

NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency

qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for

example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and

completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not

include contract administration activities performed by Architect.

1.4 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Architect.



100% CD



1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or

requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting

requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent

requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect

for direction before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision

before proceeding.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups.

1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup

construction.

2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.

B. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other

required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design

professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or

certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance

with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors

used in performing these services.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

3. Description of test and inspection.

4. Identification of applicable standards.



100% CD



5. Identification of test and inspection methods.

6. Number of tests and inspections required.

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

E. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.

F. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.

8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspection.

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making

report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.



100% CD



C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in

other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service

representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products

from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and

technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose

work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and

extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation

of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of



100% CD



manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the

following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with

performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will

perform same tasks for Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.

Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work

complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups of size indicated.

2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.

4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project.

5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication,

or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop

Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which

mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.

Comply with requirements in "Mockups" Paragraph.



100% CD



1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to

perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspection allowances, as

authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or

not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor

by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspection will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.



100% CD



5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.

E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections.

F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's

services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and

conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed

portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and

replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with

Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and

inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.



100% CD



3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas

and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as

possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in

Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 EXECUTION


SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the

Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Installation of the Work.

2. Cutting and patching.

3. Progress cleaning.

4. Protection of installed construction.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions

of the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after

installation of subsequent work.


A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time

cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance

and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform

patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.



100% CD



5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be

relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time

permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during

interruption of permanent services and systems.

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept

hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of

construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of

locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.

Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and

patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or

increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components

in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in

increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements

include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Fire separation assemblies.

c. Air or smoke barriers.

d. Fire-suppression systems.

e. Plumbing piping systems.

f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

g. Control systems.

h. Communication systems.

i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.

j. Conveying systems.

k. Electrical wiring systems.

l. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in

reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or

decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not

limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.

c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.



100% CD



e. Equipment supports.

f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner

that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and

replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and

procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent

possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of

in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.



100% CD



B. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the

Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

4. Recommended corrections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding

with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control

of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.



100% CD



D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction

items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of

excessive noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to

confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with

indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size

and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with

other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size

and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.

Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their

original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not

to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.



100% CD



D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free

passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to

requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before

cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply

with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.

4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as

practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching

and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and

appearance.



100% CD



a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and

intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final

paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional

coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,

mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors

are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



100% CD



G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials

down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise

deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain

undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the

Work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy

requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

3. Section 028200 “Asbestos Abatement” for removal and disposal of asbestos containing

materials.

4. Section 070150.19 “Preparation for Re-roofing” for selective demolition associated with

roofing work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated

to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,

prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain (ETR): Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle

methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless

indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.



100% CD




A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures

proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control,

and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending

dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Use of elevator and stairs.

5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction,

including finish surfaces, which might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition

operations. Submit before Work begins.

E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion

of selective demolition.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report

on the presence of hazardous materials is included in the Project Manual. Examine report to

become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.



100% CD



F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition

operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing

conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any

element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or

adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective

demolition activities.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and

preconstruction photographs or video.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

salvage operations.

2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be

reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,

materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.



100% CD



3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas

to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

c. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and

make equipment operational.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

e. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

C. Existing Rooftop Equipment to be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make

equipment operational.

1. Verify and document condition of existing rooftop equipment prior to removal. Convey

information on existing conditions to Owner.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and

to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage

and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are

exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and

finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of

construction being demolished.



100% CD



1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting

members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices

during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,

protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations

after selective demolition operations are complete.



100% CD



3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain

and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,

using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved

construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.




100% CD

WRL # 15073.00 028200-1 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

©Westlake Reed Leskosky

SECTION 028200

ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This asbestos abatement project will consist of the removal and disposal of asbestos containing

materials (ACM) at The Fashion Institute of Technology, Pomerantz Building D, 300 Seventh

Avenue, New York, New York 10001.

B. The work shall include but not be limited to the removal of the following materials:

Material Description Location of Asbestos Containing Material Approximate

Quantity

Square Feet

Tar Built up roofing layer 17,460

Black mastic Under metal cap of high parapet 550

Tar paper Under metal cap of low parapet 120

Tar On bricks under metal cap of low parapet 120

Tar On skylight caps 50

Tar On metal flashing of MER bulkhead wall, high parapet

wall, and fan unit

1,100

C. The Contractor shall be aware of all conditions of the project and is responsible for verifying

quantities and locations of all work to be performed. Failure to do so shall not relieve the

Contractor of its obligation to furnish all labor and materials necessary to perform the work.

D. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the project documents and all governing

codes, rules, and regulations. Where conflicts occur between the project documents and

applicable codes, rules, and regulations, the more stringent shall apply.

E. Working hours shall be as required and approved by The Fashion Institute of Technology.

Asbestos abatement activities including, but not limited to, work area preparation, gross

removal activities, cleaning activities, waste removal, etc. may need to be performed during

‘off-hours’ (including nights and weekends). In addition, multiple mobilizations may be

required to perform the work identified in this project. The Contractor shall coordinate and

schedule all work with the facility and Owner’s representative.

1.02 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS

A. Any asbestos project variances required for the project are the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.03 PERMITS AND COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable

Federal, State, and local laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to work practices, protection of

workers, authorized visitors to the site, persons, and property adjacent to the work.

B. Perform asbestos related work in accordance with New York City Department of

Environmental Protection Title 15 Chapter 1, New York State Industrial Code Rule 56, 40



100% CD



CFR 61, and 29 CFR 1926. Where more stringent requirements are specified, adhere to the

more stringent requirements.

C. The Contractor must maintain current licenses, permits and certifications pursuant to New

York City Department of Environmental Protection, New York State Department of Labor,

and Department of Environmental Conservation for all work related to this project, including

the removal, handling, transport, and disposal of asbestos containing materials.

D. The Contractor must have and submit proof upon request that any persons employed by the

Contractor to engage in or supervise work on any asbestos project have both a valid NYC DEP

and NYS DOL asbestos handling certificates pursuant to regulations.

E. The Contractor shall comply fully with any Variance secured from regulatory agencies by the

Owner in the performance of the work.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all Variances as may be required for the

Project or as requested by the Owner. Approval of the Owner is required prior to submission

of a Variance application to any regulatory agency. Failure to obtain Owner approval may

result in Owner not permitting variance to be used on the project.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with New York City Fire Prevention and

Department of Building Codes, or their successors during all work at the site.

H. Failure to adhere to the project documents shall constitute a breach of the contract and the

Owner shall have the right to and may terminate the contract provided, however, the failure of

the Owner to so terminate shall not relieve the Contractor from future compliance.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Pre-Work Submittals: Within 7 days prior to the pre-construction conference, the Contractor

shall submit 3 copies of the documents listed below, for review and approval prior to the

commencement of asbestos abatement activities:

1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor.

2. A list of projects performed within the past two (2) years including the dollar value of

all projects. Provide project references to include owner, consultant, and air monitoring

firm's name, contact persons, address, and phone number.

3. Progress Schedule:

a. Show the complete sequence of abatement activities and the sequencing of work

within each building or building section.

b. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of work

including substantial completion dates for each work area, building, or phase.

4. Project Notifications: As required by NYC DEP, NYS DOL, and US EPA regulatory

agencies together with proof of transmittal (i.e. certified mail return receipt).

5. Building Occupant Notification: As required by regulatory agencies.

6. Abatement Work Plan: Provide plans that clearly indicate the following:

a. All work areas numbered sequentially.

b. Locations and types of all decontamination enclosures.

c. Entrances and exits to the work areas.

d. Type of abatement activity/technique for each work area.

e. Location of water and electrical connections to building services.

f. Waste transport routes through the building to the waste storage container.

7. Disposal Site / Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency.

8. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit.



100% CD



B. On-Site Submittals: Refer to Part 3.01.C & D for all submittals, documentation, and postings

required to be maintained on-site during abatement activities.

C. Project Close-Out Submittals: Within 30 days of the completion of each abatement phase, the

Contractor shall submit one copy of the documents listed below to the Owner and one copy to

the environmental consultant for review and approval prior to Contractor’s final payment.

1. All waste disposal manifests and disposal logs (original waste manifests).

2. OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during the work.

3. Daily progress log, including the entry/exit log.

4. Provide the Contractor’s Acknowledgement Statement (Appendix A) that lists all

Workers used in the performance of the Project, including name and NYC DEP and

NYS DOL certification numbers. The statement shall be notarized.

5. Disposal Site / Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency.

6. Project notifications, amended notifications, Variances.

1.05 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to start of preparatory work under this contract, the Contractor shall attend a pre-

construction conference attended by Owner, Facility Personnel, and Environmental

Consultant.

B. Agenda for this conference shall include but not necessarily be limited to:

1. Contractor's Scope of Work, Work Plan, and Schedule to include number of workers

and shifts.

2. Contractor's safety and health precautions including protective clothing and equipment

and decontamination procedures.

3. Environmental Consultant's duties, functions, and authority.

4. Contractor's work procedures including:

a. Methods of job site preparation and removal methods.

b. Respiratory protection.

c. Disposal procedures.

d. Cleanup procedures.

e. Fire exits and emergency procedures.

5. Contractor’s required pre-work and on-site submittals, documentation, and postings.

6. Contractor's plan for twenty-four (24) hour project security both for prevention of theft

and for barring entry of unauthorized personnel into work areas.

7. Temporary utilities.

8. Handling of moveable objects.

9. Storage of removed asbestos containing materials.

10. Waste disposal requirements and procedures.

C. In conjunction with the conference the Contractor shall accompany the Owner and

Environmental Consultant on a pre-construction walk-through documenting existing condition

of finishes, reviewing overall work plan, location of fire exits, fire protection equipment, water

supply and temporary electric tie-in.

1.06 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

A. The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and standards, except where more

stringent requirements are shown or specified:

B. Federal Regulations:

1. 29 CFR 1910.1001, "Asbestos" (OSHA)



100% CD



2. 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" (OSHA)

3. 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" (OSHA)

4. 29 CFR 1910.145, "Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags" (OSHA)

5. 29 CFR 1926, "Construction Industry" (OSHA)

6. 29 CFR 1926.1101, "Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite" (OSHA)

7. 29 CFR 1926.500 "Guardrails, Handrails and Covers" (OSHA)

8. 40 CFR 61, Subpart A, "General Provisions" (EPA)

9. 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, "National Emission Standard for Asbestos" (EPA)

10. 49 CFR 171-172, Transportation Standards (DOT)

C. New York State Regulations:

1. 12 NYCRR, Part 56, "Asbestos", Industrial Code Rule 56 (DOL)

2. 6 NYCRR, Parts 360, 364, Disposal and Transportation (DEC)

3. 10 NYCRR, Part 73, "Asbestos Safety Program Requirements" (DOH)

4. “New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code”

D. New York City Regulations:

1. New York City Department of Environmental Protection Title 15 Chapter 1 asbestos

regulations (DEP)

E. Standards and Guidance Documents:

1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z88.2-80, Practices for Respiratory

Protection

2. ANSI Z9.2-79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust

Systems

3. EPA 560/585-024, Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in

Buildings (Purple Book)

4. EPA 530-SW-85-007, Asbestos Waste Management Guidance

5. ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement

Projects”

1.07 NOTICES

A. The Contractor shall provide notification of intent to commence asbestos abatement activities

as indicated below.

1. At least ten (10) working days (M-F) prior to beginning abatement activities, send

written notification to:

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Coordinator

26 Federal Plaza

New York, NY 10007

2. At least ten (10) calendar days prior to beginning abatement activities send written

notification to:

New York State Department of Labor

Division of Safety and Health, Asbestos Control Program.

State Office Campus

Building 12 - Room 161B

Albany, NY 12240

3. At least seven (7) calendar days prior to beginning abatement activities send written

notification to:

New York City Department of Environmental Protection



100% CD



Asbestos Control Program.

59-17 Junction Boulevard – 8th Floor

Flushing, New York 11373

B. The Contractor is required to send notifications to regulatory agencies via electronic, mail, or

package delivery service that will provide proof of delivery and receipt.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining current project filings with regulatory

agencies for the duration of the project.

D. The Contractor shall post and/or provide Building Occupant Notification at least 10 days prior

to beginning abatement activities as required by Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code Rule 56.

1.08 PROJECT MONITORING AND AIR SAMPLING

A. The Owner shall engage the services of an Environmental Consultant (the Consultant) who

shall serve as the Owner's Representative in regard to the performance of the asbestos

abatement project and provide direction as required throughout the entire abatement project

period. The consultant and all subconsultants shall not have any contractual relationship with

the Contractor for the duration of the asbestos project.

B. The Contractor is required to ensure cooperation of its personnel with the Consultant for the air

sampling and project monitoring functions described in this section. The Contractor shall

comply with all direction given by the Consultant during the course of the project.

C. The Consultant shall provide the following administrative services:

1. Review and approve or disapprove all submittals, shop drawings, schedules, and

samples.

2. Assure that all notifications to governmental agencies by the Contractor are submitted in

a timely manner and are correct in content.

D. The Consultant shall staff the project with a trained and certified person(s) to act on the

Owner's behalf at the job site. This individual shall be designated as the Abatement Project

Monitor (APM).

1. The APM shall be on-site at all times the Contractor is on-site. The Contractor shall not

be permitted to conduct any work unless the APM is on-site (except for inspection of

barriers and negative air system during non-working days).

2. The APM shall have the authority to direct the actions of the Contractor verbally and in

writing to ensure compliance with the project documents and all regulations. The APM

shall have the authority to Stop Work when gross work practice deficiencies or unsafe

practices are observed, or when ambient fiber concentrations outside the removal area

exceed 0.01 f/cc or background level.

a. Such Stop Work Order shall be effective immediately and remain in effect until

corrective measures have been taken and the situation has been corrected.

b. Standby time and air sample collection and analysis required to resolve the

situation shall be at the Contractor's expense.

3. The APM shall provide the following services:

a. Inspection of the Contractor's work, practices, and procedures, including

temporary protection requirements, for compliance with all regulations and

project specifications.

b. Provide abatement project air sampling as required by applicable regulations

(NYC, NYS, AHERA) and the Owner. Sampling will include, but not be limited



100% CD



to background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, final cleaning, and

clearance air sampling.

c. Verify daily that all workers used in the performance of the project are certified

by the appropriate regulatory agency.

d. Monitor the progress of the Contractor's work, and report any deviations from the

schedule to the Owner.

e. Monitor, verify, and document all waste load-out operations including placement

of generator and location labels on each waste container, as required by Federal

regulations.

f. Verify that the Contractor is performing personal air monitoring daily, and that

results are being returned and posted at the site as required.

g. The APM shall maintain a log on site that documents all project related and

Consultant and Contractor actions, activities, and occurrences.

h. Verify landfill to be used for waste disposal with waste transporter(driver) and

Contractor prior to waste trailer/dumpster leaving site. Confirm the waste

transporter firm and landfill are listed on the regulatory notifications for the

project and the waste transport vehicle license number is listed on the current

NYS DEC Waste Transporter permit.

4. The following minimum inspections shall be conducted by the APM, accompanied by

the Contractor’s supervisor. Additional inspections shall be conducted as required by

project conditions and/or the Owner’s direction. Progression from one phase of work to

the next by the Contractor is only permitted with the written approval of the APM.

a. Pre-Construction Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the

existing conditions of the work areas and to document these conditions.

b. Pre-Commencement Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the

integrity of each containment system prior to disturbance of any asbestos

containing material. This inspection shall take place only after the work area is

fully prepped for removal.

c. Work Inspections: The purpose of this inspection is to monitor the work

practices and procedures employed on the project and to monitor the continued

integrity of the containment system. Inspections within the removal areas shall

be conducted by the APM during all preparation, removal, and cleaning activities

at least twice every work shift. Additional inspections shall be conducted as

warranted.

d. Pre-Encapsulation Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to ensure the

complete removal of Asbestos Containing Material (ACM), from all surfaces in

the work area prior to encapsulation.

e. Visual Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify that: all

materials in the scope of work have been properly removed; no visible asbestos

debris/residue remains; no pools of liquid or condensation remains; and all

required cleanings are complete. This inspection shall be conducted before final

air clearance testing.

f. Post-Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to ensure the

complete removal of ACM, including debris, from the work area after

satisfactory final clearance sampling and removal of all isolation and critical

barriers and equipment from the work area.

g. Punch List Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the Contractor's

certification that all work has been completed as contracted and the existing

condition of the area prior to its release to the Owner.

E. The Consultant shall provide abatement project air sampling and analysis as required by

applicable regulations (New York City and New York State). Sampling will include but is not



100% CD



limited to, background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and

clearance air sampling.

1. Unless otherwise required by applicable regulations, the Consultant shall have samples

analyzed by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). Results shall be available within 24

hours of completion of sampling.

2. Samples shall be collected as required by applicable regulations (New York City and

New York State) and these specifications. If Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)

clearance air sampling is utilized by the Owner, the clearance criteria and sampling

protocols must be in compliance with AHERA. If PCM air sample analysis results

exceed the satisfactory clearance criteria, then TEM analysis of the entire set of

clearance air samples may be used, provided that a standard NIOSH / ELAP accepted

laboratory analysis method is utilized that shall report each air sample result in fibers

per cubic centimeter.

3. If the air sampling during any phase of the abatement project reveals airborne fiber

levels at or above .01 fibers/cc or the established background level, whichever is greater,

outside the regulated work area, work shall stop immediately and corrective measures

required by Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code Rule 56 shall be initiated. Notify all employers

and occupants in adjacent areas. The Contractor shall bear the burden of any and all

costs incurred by this delay.

1.09 CONTRACTOR AIR SAMPLING

A. In addition to the requirements of OSHA 1926.1101, the Contractor shall be required to

perform personal air monitoring every work shift in each work area during which abatement

activities occur in order to determine that appropriate respiratory protection is being worn and

utilized.

B. The Contractor shall conduct air sampling that is representative of both the 8-hour time

weighted average and 30-minute short-term exposures to indicate compliance with the

permissible exposure and excursion limits.

C. The Contractor's laboratory analysis of air samples shall be conducted by an NYS DOH ELAP

approved laboratory. The consultant shall not collect or analyze the Contractor’s air samples.

D. Results of personnel air sample analyses shall be available, verbally, within twenty-four (24)

hours of sampling and shall be posted upon receipt. Written laboratory reports shall be

delivered and posted at the work site within five (5) days. Failure to comply with these

requirements may result in all work being stopped until compliance is achieved.

1.10 PROJECT SUPERVISOR

A. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor who shall meet the following

qualifications:

1. The Project Supervisor shall hold New York City and New York State certification as

an Asbestos Supervisor.

2. The Project Supervisor shall meet the requirements of a "Competent Person" as defined

by OSHA 1926.1101 and shall have a minimum of one year experience as a supervisor.

3. The Project Supervisor must be able to speak, read, and write English fluently, as well

as communicate in the primary language of the workers.

B. If the Project Supervisor is not on-site at any time whatsoever, all work shall be stopped. The

Project Supervisor shall remain on-site until the project is complete. The Contractor may not

remove the Project Supervisor from the project without the written consent of the Owner and



100% CD



the Environmental Consultant; however the Project Supervisor shall be removed from the

Project if so requested by the Owner.

C. The Project Supervisor shall maintain the bound Daily Project Log and the entry/exit logs as

required by New York City and New York State regulations and these specifications.

D. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the performance of the work and shall represent

the Contractor in all respects at the project site. The Supervisor shall be the primary point of

contact for the Asbestos Project Monitor.

1.11 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide workers with a comprehensive medical

examination as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101.

1. This examination is not required if adequate records show the employee has been

examined as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101 within the past

year.

2. The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to employees engaged

in an occupation involving potential disturbance of asbestos fibers.

1.12 TRAINING

A. As required by applicable regulations, prior to assignment to asbestos work instruct each

employee with regard to the hazards of asbestos, safety and health precautions, and the use and

requirements of protective clothing and equipment.

B. Establish a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2 and 29 CFR 1910.134, and 29 CFR

1926.1101. Provide respirator training and fit testing.

1.13 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION

A. Select respirators from those approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and

Health (NIOSH).

B. Respirators shall be individually fit-tested to personnel under the direction of an Industrial

Hygienist on a yearly basis. Fit-tested respirators shall be permanently marked to identify the

individual fitted, and use shall be limited to that individual.

C. Where fiber levels permit, and in compliance with regulatory requirements, Powered Air

Purifying Respirators (PAPR) are the minimum allowable respiratory protection permitted to

be utilized during gross removal operations of OSHA Class I or OSHA Class II friable ACM.

D. No respirators shall be issued to personnel without such personnel participating in a respirator

training program.

E. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirator filters shall be approved by NIOSH and

shall conform to the OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.1101.

F. A storage area for respirators shall be provided by the Contractor in the clean room side of the

personnel decontamination enclosure where they will be kept in a clean environment.

G. The Contractor shall provide and make available a sufficient quantity of respirator filters so

that filter changes can be made as necessary during the work day.



100% CD



H. Filters used with negative pressure air purifying respirators shall not be used any longer than

one eight (8) hour work day. Any loose respirator filters found within the regulated area, must

be disposed of as asbestos waste.

I. Any authorized visitor, worker, or supervisor found in the work area not wearing the required

respiratory protection shall be removed from the project site and not be permitted to return.

1.14 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original packages with containers bearing manufacturer's

name and label.

B. Store all materials at the job site in a suitable and designated area.

1. Store materials subject to deterioration or damage away from wet or damp surfaces and

under cover.

2. Protect materials from unintended contamination and theft.

3. Storage areas shall be kept clean and organized.

C. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the job site. Materials contaminated with

asbestos shall be disposed of as asbestos debris as herein specified. This includes unused

Contractor supplies located in the regulated work area.

1.15 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Shut down and lock out all electrical power to the asbestos work areas, including lighting

circuits. Any electrical power passing through the work areas that can’t be shut down due to

health and safety reasons, shall be protected as per the requirements of Title 15 Chapter 1 and

Industrial Code Rule 56.

B. Provide temporary 120-240 volt, single phase, three wire, 100 amp electric service with

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) for all electric requirements within the asbestos

Work Area.

1. Where available, obtain from Owner's existing system. Otherwise provide power from

other sources (i.e. generator).

2. Provide temporary wiring and "weatherproof" receptacles in sufficient quantity and

location to serve all HEPA equipment and tools.

3. Provide wiring and receptacles as required by the Environmental Consultant for project

monitoring and air sampling equipment.

4. All power to the work area shall be brought in from outside the area through GFCI's at

the source.

C. Provide temporary lighting with "weatherproof" fixtures for all work areas including

decontamination chambers.

1. The entire work area shall be kept illuminated at all times.

2. Provide lighting as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of

performing required inspections.

D. All temporary devices and wiring used in the work area shall be capable of decontamination

procedures including HEPA vacuuming and wet-wiping.

E. Utilize domestic water service, if available, from Owner's existing system. Provide hot water

heaters with sufficient capacity to meet project demands.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



100% CD



2.01 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

A. Provide personnel utilized during the project with disposable protective whole body clothing,

head coverings, gloves and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to

protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside the plastic or rubber for comfort, but shall not

be used alone. Make sleeves secure at the wrists and make foot coverings secure at the ankles

by the use of tape, or provide disposable coverings with elastic wrists or tops.

B. Provide sufficient quantities of protective clothing to assure a minimum of four (4) complete

disposable outfits per day for each individual performing abatement work.

C. Eye protection and hard hats shall be provided and made available for all personnel entering

any work area.

D. Authorized visitors shall be provided with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye

protection, and footwear whenever they enter the work area.

2.02 SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Provide warning signs and barrier tapes at all approaches to asbestos work areas. Locate signs

at such distance that personnel may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps

required before entering the area.

1. Provide danger signs in vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101, minimum

20" x 14" displaying the following legend.

DANGER

ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE

HAZARD

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY

RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA

2. Provide 3" wide yellow barrier tape printed with black lettered, "DANGER ASBESTOS

REMOVAL". Locate barrier tape across all corridors, entrances and access routes to

asbestos work area.

B. Provide asbestos danger labels affixed to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris and other

products contaminated with asbestos.

1. Provide asbestos danger labels of sufficient size to be clearly legible, displaying the

following legend:

DANGER

CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS

AVOID CREATING DUST

CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD

2. Provide the following asbestos labels, of sufficient size to be clearly legible, for display

on waste containers (bags or drums) which will be used to transport asbestos

contaminated material in accordance with United States Department of Transportation

49 CFR Parts 171 and 172: (Note: Include “RQ” for friable asbestos waste only.)

RQ, NA2212, (WASTE) ASBESTOS, 9, PGIII

3. Generator identification information shall be affixed to each waste container or any

packaging used to containerize asbestos waste indicating the following printed in

indelible ink:



100% CD



Generator Name

Facility Name

Facility Address

Date

2.03 DAILY PROJECT LOG & WORK AREA ENTRY/EXIT LOG

A. Provide a bound Daily Project Log. The log shall contain on title page the project name;

name, address and phone number of Owner; name, address and phone number of

Environmental Consultant; name, address and phone number of Abatement Contractor;

emergency numbers including, but not limited to local Fire/Rescue Department and all other

New York City and New York State requirements.

B. All entries into the log shall be made in non-washable, permanent ink and such pen shall be

strung to or otherwise attached to the log to prevent removal from the log-in area. Under no

circumstances shall pencil entries be permitted.

C. All persons entering and exiting the work area shall sign the entry/exit log and include name,

certification number, and time.

D. The Project Supervisor shall document all work performed daily and note all inspections

required by Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code Rule 56, i.e. testing and inspection of barriers and

enclosures.

2.04 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS

A. Provide all scaffolding and/or staging as necessary to accomplish the work of this contract.

Scaffolding may be of suspension type or standing type such as metal tube and coupler, tubular

welded frame, pole or outrigger type or cantilever type. The type, erection and use of all

scaffolding and ladders shall comply with all applicable OSHA construction industry

standards.

B. Provide scaffolding and ladders as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes

of performing required inspections.

2.05 SURFACTANT (AMENDED WATER)

A. Wet all asbestos-containing materials prior to removal with surfactant mixed and applied in

accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

2.06 ENCAPSULANT

A. Encapsulant shall be tinted or pigmented so that application when dry is readily discernible.

B. The encapsulant solvent or vehicle shall not contain a volatile hydrocarbon.

2.07 WASTE DISPOSAL BAGS, DRUMS, AND CONTAINERS

A. Provide 6 mil polyethylene disposal bags printed with asbestos caution labels. Bags shall also

be imprinted with U.S. Department of Transportation required markings.

B. Provide 30 or 55 gallon capacity fiber, plastic, or metal drums capable of being sealed air and

water tight if asbestos waste has the potential to damage or puncture disposal bags. Affix

asbestos caution labels on lids and at one-third points around drum circumference to assure

ready identification.



100% CD



C. Containers and bags must be labeled accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 NESHAPS, Code Rule

56, and Title 15 Chapter 1. When the bags/containers are moved to the holding area, lockable

trailer, or lockable hardtop dumpster from the waste decontamination system washroom, each

bag/container must also be appropriately labeled with the date moved in waterproof

markings.

D. Labeled ACM waste containers or bags shall not be used for non-ACM waste or trash. Any

material placed in labeled containers or bags, whether turned inside out or not shall be handled

and disposed of as ACM waste.

2.08 HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT

A. All vacuuming performed under this contract shall be performed with High Efficiency

Particulate Air (HEPA) filter equipped industrial vacuums conforming to ANSI Z9.2.

2.09 POWER TOOLS

A. Any power tools used to drill, cut into, or otherwise disturb asbestos material shall be

manufacturer equipped with HEPA filtered local exhaust ventilation.

2.10 FIRE RETARDANT PLASTIC SHEETING

A. All polyethylene (plastic) sheeting used on the project (including but not limited to sheeting

used for critical and isolation barriers, fixed objects, walls, floors, ceilings, waste container)

shall be at least 6 mil fire retardant sheeting.

B. Decontamination enclosure systems shall utilize at least 6 mil opaque fire retardant plastic

sheeting. At least 2 layers of 6 mil reinforced fire retardant plastic sheeting shall be used for

the flooring.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Should visible emissions or water leaks be observed outside the work area, immediately stop

work and institute emergency procedures per Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code Rule 56. Should

there be elevated fiber levels outside the work area, immediately stop work, institute

emergency procedures per Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code Rule 56, and notify all employers and

occupants in adjacent areas. All costs incurred in decontaminating such non-work areas and

the contents thereof shall be borne by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Valid NYC DEP and NYS DOL Asbestos Handler certification cards shall be on site prior to

admittance of any Contractor’s employees to the asbestos work area.

C. The following submittals, documentation, and postings shall be maintained on-site by the

Contractor during abatement activities at a location approved by the Abatement Project

Monitor:

1. Valid Contractor handling license issued by New York State Department of Labor.

2. NYC DEP and NYS DOL Asbestos Handler certification cards for each person

employed in the removal, handling, or disturbance of asbestos.

3. Daily OSHA personal air monitoring results.

4. NYS Department of Health ELAP certification for the laboratory that will be analyzing

the OSHA personnel air samples.

5. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit.

6. Project documents (specifications and drawings.)



100% CD



7. Notifications, Variances, Approved Work Plan. Ensure that the most up-to-date

Notifications and Variances are on-site.

8. Applicable regulations.

9. Safety Data Sheets of supplies/chemicals used on the project.

10. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency.

11. List of emergency telephone numbers.

12. Waste Disposal Log.

13. Daily Project Log.

14. Entry/Exit Logs.

D. The following documentation shall be maintained on-site by the Abatement Project Monitor

during abatement activities:

1. Valid contractor handling license issued by New York State Department of Labor.

2. Air Sample Log.

3. Air sample results.

4. Project Monitor Daily Log

5. Asbestos Survey Report.

6. A copy of ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos

Abatement Projects.”

7. Calibration chart for rotometer(s) used on-site.

E. The work area must be vacated by building occupants prior to decontamination enclosure

construction and work area preparation.

3.02 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE

A. Provide a remote or contiguous personnel decontamination enclosure to the work area or as per

Variance. The personnel decontamination chamber shall be fully framed, sheathed, and

lockable to prevent unauthorized entry.

B. Access to the work area will be from the clean room through an airlock to the shower and

through an airlock to the equipment room. Each airlock shall be a minimum of three feet from

door to door. Additional airlocks shall be provided as required by Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code

Rule 56 for remote decontamination enclosures.

C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with two layers of opaque 6

mil fire retardant plastic sheeting. Two layers of reinforced fire retardant plastic sheeting shall

be used to cover the floor.

D. The entrance to the clean room shall have a lockable door. Provide suitable lockers for storage

of worker's street clothes. Storage for respirators along with replacement filters and disposable

towels shall also be provided.

E. Provide a temporary shower with individual hot and cold water supplies and faucets. Provide a

sufficient supply of soap and shampoo. There shall be one shower for every six workers. The

shower room shall be constructed in such a way so that travel through the shower chamber

shall be through the shower. The shower shall not be able to be bypassed.

F. Shower water shall be drained, collected and filtered through a system with at least a 5.0

micron particle size collection capability containing a series of several filters with

progressively smaller pore sizes to avoid rapid clogging of the system. The filtered waste

water shall then be discharged in accordance with applicable codes and the contaminated

filters disposed of as asbestos waste.



100% CD



G. The equipment room shall be used for the storage of tools and equipment. A walk-off pan

filled with water shall be located in the work area outside the equipment room for workers to

clean foot coverings when leaving the work area. A labeled 6 mil plastic ACM waste bag for

collection of contaminated clothing shall be located in this room.

H. The personal decontamination enclosure shall be cleaned and disinfected minimally at the end

of each work shift and as otherwise directed by the Asbestos Project Monitor.

3.03 WASTE DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE

A. Provide a remote or contiguous waste decontamination enclosure to the Work area. The waste

decontamination chamber shall be fully framed, sheathed, and lockable to prevent

unauthorized entry.

B. The waste decontamination enclosure system shall consist of a holding area, air lock and

washroom. The airlock shall be a minimum of three feet from door to door. The entrance to

the holding area shall have a lockable door.

C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with two layers of opaque 6

mil fire retardant plastic sheeting on walls and ceiling. Two layers of reinforced fire retardant

plastic sheeting shall be used to cover the floor.

D. Where there is only one egress from the Work Area, the holding area of the waste

decontamination enclosure system may branch off from the personnel decontamination

enclosure equipment room, which then serves as the waste wash room.

E. The waste wash room water shall be drained, collected, and filtered through a system with at

least a 5.0 micron particle size collection capability containing a series of several filters with

progressively smaller pore sizes to avoid rapid clogging of the system. The filtered waste

water shall then be discharged in accordance with applicable codes and the contaminated

filters disposed of as asbestos waste.

F. In small asbestos projects where only one egress from the work area exists, the shower room

may be used as a waste washroom. In this instance, the clean room shall not be used for waste

storage, but shall be used for waste transfer to carts, which shall immediately be removed from

this enclosure.

3.04 WORK AREA ENTRY AND EXIT PROCEDURES

A. Access to and from the asbestos work area is permitted only through the personnel

decontamination enclosure unless otherwise stipulated in a Site Specific Variance.

B. Workers shall sign the entry/exit log upon every entry and exit.

C. The following procedures shall be followed when entering the work area:

1. Before entering the work area, workers shall proceed to the clean room, remove all

street clothes, and don protective clothing, equipment, and respirators.

2. Workers shall proceed from the clean room through the shower room and the equipment

room and into the Work Area.

D. The following procedures shall be followed when exiting the work area:

1. Before leaving the work area, gross asbestos contamination will be removed by

brushing, wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming, followed by use of the walk-off pan.



100% CD



2. In the equipment room, workers shall remove disposable clothing, but not respirators,

and shall place clothing in plastic disposal bags for disposal as contaminated debris

prior to entering the shower room. Reusable equipment shall be removed and stored in

the equipment room (e,g, work boots).

3. Workers shall shower thoroughly while wearing respirators, then wash respirator with

soap and water prior to removal.

4. Upon exiting the shower, workers shall enter the clean room and don new disposable

clothing if the work shift is to continue or street clothes to exit area. Under no

circumstances shall workers enter public non-work areas in disposable protective

clothing.

E. If remote decontamination enclosures are permitted by Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code Rule 56 or

a Site Specific Variance, workers shall wear two disposable suits for all phases of work.

Workers exiting the work area shall HEPA vacuum the outer suit, enter the airlock, remove the

outer suit and then place it back into the work area. A clean second suit shall be donned before

exiting the airlock and proceeding to the decontamination enclosure or another work area via

the designated pathway required by Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code Rule 56.

3.05 WORK AREA PREPARATION

A. Asbestos danger signs shall be posted at all approaches to the asbestos work area. Post all

emergency exits as emergency exits only on the work area side, post with asbestos caution

signs on the non-work area side. Provide all non-work area stairs and corridors accessible to

the asbestos work area with warning tapes at the base of stairs and beginning of corridors.

Warning tapes shall be in addition to caution signs.

B. Shut down and lock out the building heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.

Electrical systems and circuits shall also be shut down unless permitted to remain active per

Title 15 Chapter 1 and Code Rule 56 and appropriately protected and labeled. Existing

lighting sources shall not be utilized. Provide temporary electric power and lighting as

specified herein.

C. All non-ACM surfaces and objects within the work area shall be pre-cleaned using HEPA

vacuuming and/or wet-wiping methods. Dry sweeping and any other methods that raise dust

shall be prohibited. ACM shall not be disturbed during pre-cleaning.

D. Any movable objects within the work area shall be HEPA vacuumed and/or wet-wiped and

removed from the work area.

E. All non-movable equipment in the work area shall be completely covered with 2 layers of fire

retardant plastic sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness, and secured in place with duct tape and/or

spray adhesive.

F. Provide critical barriers by sealing off all openings including but not limited to operable

windows and skylights, doorways, diffusers, grills, electrical outlets and boxes, doors, floor

drains, and any other penetrations to surfaces in the work area enclosure, using 2 layers of at

least 6 mil fire retardant plastic sheeting.

H. Isolation barriers in stairwells and at work area egress locations shall not be covered with

sheathing, only two layers of 6 mil fire retardant plastic sheeting.

I. Unless otherwise specified for removal, the Contractor shall either protect all non-ACM

insulation on piping, ductwork, tanks, etc. in the work area using two layers of six mil fire



100% CD



retardant plastic sheeting or remove the insulation as asbestos containing waste. If the

Contractor elects to remove the non-ACM insulation as asbestos-contaminated, he/she shall be

responsible for reinsulation if reinsulation of removed insulations is part of the contract or

project.

J. Frame out emergency exits from work area as necessary. Provide double layer 6 mil fire

retardant plastic sheeting and tape seal opening. Post as emergency exits only and tape utility

knife to the work area side of each exit. Within the work area, mark the locations and

directions of emergency exits throughout the work area using exit signs and/or duct tape.

K. Remove all items attached to or in contact with ACM only after the work area enclosure is in

place. HEPA vacuum and wet wipe with amended water all items prior to their removal from

the work area and before the start of asbestos removal operations.

3.06 NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEM A. Negative air pressure filtration system is not necessary for this roof removal project.

3.07 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Asbestos-containing materials shall be removed in accordance with the Contract Documents

and the approved Asbestos Work Plan.

B. Sufficiently wet asbestos materials with a low pressure, airless fine spray of surfactant to

ensure full penetration prior to material removal. Re-wet material that does not display

evidence of saturation.

C. One worker shall continuously apply amended water while ACM is being removed.

D. Perform cutting, drilling, abrading, or any penetration or disturbance of asbestos containing

material in a manner to minimize the dispersal of asbestos fibers into the air. Use equipment

and methods specifically designed to limit generation of airborne asbestos particles. All power

operated tools used shall be provided with manufacturer HEPA equipped filtered local exhaust

ventilation, as required by regulation.

E. Upon removal of ACM from the substrate, the newly exposed surfaces shall be HEPA

vacuumed and/or wet cleaned. Surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned using necessary methods.

F. All removed material shall be placed into 6 mil plastic disposal bags or other suitable container

upon detachment from the substrate. Cleanup of accumulations of loose debris or waste shall

be performed whenever there is enough accumulation to fill a single bag or container and

minimally at the end of each workshift.

G. Large components shall be wrapped in two layers of 6 mil fire retardant plastic sheeting.

Sharp components likely to tear disposal bags shall be placed in fiber drums or boxes and then

wrapped with sheeting.

H. Power or pressure washers are not permitted for asbestos removal or clean-up procedures

unless approved in a Site Specific Variance and allowed by owner.

3.08 EQUIPMENT AND WASTE CONTAINER DECONTAMINATION AND REMOVAL

PROCEDURES A. External surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned by wet cleaning

and/or HEPA vacuuming in the work area before moving such items into the waste



100% CD



decontamination enclosure system airlock by persons assigned to this duty. The persons in the

work area shall not enter the airlock. No gross removal operations are permitted when waste

transfer is in progress.

B. The containers and equipment shall be removed from the airlock by persons stationed in the

washroom during waste removal operations. The external surfaces of containers and

equipment shall be cleaned a second time by wet cleaning.

C. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment are to be dried of any excessive

pooled or beaded liquid, placed in uncontaminated 6 mil plastic bags or sheeting, as the item's

physical characteristics demand, and sealed airtight.

D. The clean recontainerized items shall be moved into the airlock that leads to the holding area.

Workers in the washroom shall not enter this airlock.

E. Containers and equipment shall be moved from the airlock and into the holding area by

persons dressed in clean personal protective equipment, who have entered from the holding

area.

F. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment shall be placed in water tight carts

with doors or tops that shall be closed and secured. These carts shall be held in the holding

until transfer to the waste container. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed at

least once each day.

G. The exit from the decontamination enclosure system shall be secured to prevent unauthorized

entry.

3.09 WORK AREA DECONTAMINATION, CLEANING, AND CLEARANCE PROCEDURES A. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste

materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed

unless modified by a Site Specific Variance.

B. Final Cleaning

1. All surfaces in the work area shall be HEPA vacuumed and then wet cleaned.

2. After the required waiting/settling/drying time has elapsed, the APM shall conduct a

visual inspection of the work area for completeness of abatement and cleanliness. The

APM shall document the results of the visual inspection in the Project Monitor Log and

Contractor’s Daily Project Log.

3. After satisfactory APM visual inspection, final clearance air sampling shall then be

conducted by the Environmental Consultant provided no visible asbestos debris/residue;

pools of liquid, or condensation remains.

4. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the isolation and critical

barriers shall be removed and bagged as asbestos waste. Following this and satisfactory

inspections by the Project Supervisor and the APM for cleanliness, the decontamination

enclosures shall be removed.

C. As a result of any visual inspection by the APM or should air sampling results indicate high

fiber levels, the Contractor will reclean the affected areas at no additional expense to the

Owner.

3.10 TENT ENCLOSURES A. No tent enclosures are required for this roof removal project.



100% CD



3.11 GLOVEBAG REMOVAL

A. No glovebag removal procedures are required for this roof removal project.

3.12 REMOVALS OF EXTERIOR NON-FRIABLE ACM

A. Except as modified by this section, removal of exterior non-friable ACM (i.e. roof flashings,

built-up roofing, siding, caulking, glazing compound, transite, tars, sealers, coatings, and other

NOB ACM) shall conform to all provisions of this specification.

B. Unless Site Specific Variances have been otherwise obtained, removals shall be conducted in

accordance with the provisions of NYC DEP Title 15 Chapter 1.

C. The work area shall be the area from which ACM materials are being removed and shall

extend 25 feet from the perimeter of the removal area.

D. Non-certified workers are not allowed in the work area until the work area is cleared by the

Asbestos Project Monitor (APM).

E. Remote personnel decontamination enclosures and waste decontamination enclosures shall be

constructed at a location in accordance with the approved work plan. Decontamination

enclosures shall be cordoned off at a distance of 25 feet to separate them from public areas.

F. All openings (including but not limited to operable windows, doors, hatches, vents, ducts, and

grilles) within 25 feet of the work area shall be sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene.

G. The removal of the ACM may require the use of scrapers, solvents, mastic removal chemicals,

or other methods/procedures to ensure complete removal.

H. The Contractor is required to provide temporary protection of the building (i.e. roof, window

openings, construction joints, etc.) at the end of each work shift so as to maintain the building

in a watertight condition.

I. Dumpsters used for waste storage shall be lined with two layers of six mil polyethylene and

shall have a hard top. Where open-top dumpsters are permitted by a Site Specific Variance,

the top shall be closed with polyethylene flaps that are sealed at the end of each work shift.

J. Personal protective equipment, including respirators, shall be utilized and worn during all

removal operations until the work area is cleared by the APM.

K. The Owner may, at his discretion, choose to conduct air sampling. If air samples collected

during abatement indicate any airborne asbestos fiber concentration(s) at or above 0.01 f/cc,

Work shall be stopped immediately and work methods shall be altered to reduce the airborne

asbestos fiber concentration(s).

L. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste

materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be

followed:

1. All surfaces in the work area shall be HEPA vacuumed and then wet cleaned.

2. The APM shall conduct a visual inspection of the work area for cleanliness and

completeness of abatement. The APM shall document the results of the visual

inspection in the Project Monitor Log and Contractor’s Daily Project Log.

3. Clearance air sampling will be conducted by the APM.



100% CD



4. Upon satisfactory visual inspection results and clearance air sampling, the isolation and

critical barriers shall be removed and bagged as asbestos waste. Following this, the

decontamination enclosures shall be removed.

3.13 NON-FRIABLE FLOORING AND/OR MASTIC REMOVALS A. No flooring or floor mastic removals are required on this roof removal project.

3.14 RESTORATION OF UTILITIES, FIRESTOPPING, AND FINISHES

A. After final clearance, remove locks and restore electrical and HVAC systems. All temporary

power shall be disconnected, power lockouts removed and power restored. All temporary

plumbing shall be removed.

B. Finishes damaged by asbestos abatement activities including, but not limited to, brick,

plaster/paint damage due to duct tape, staples, and spray adhesives, shall be restored prior to

final payment.

1. Finishes unable to be restored shall be replaced under this contract at the Contractor’s

expense.

2. All foam and expandable foam products and materials used to seal work area openings

shall be completely removed upon completion of abatement activities.

C. All penetrations (including, but not limited to, pipes, ducts, etc.) through fire rated construction

shall be firestopped using materials and systems tested in accordance with ASTM E814 on

Projects where reinsulation is part of the required work.

PART 4 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE

4.01 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL SITE

A. The Contractor's Hauler and Disposal Site shall be approved by the Owner. All waste

generated during the asbestos project shall be disposed of as RACM asbestos waste.

B. The Contractor shall give twenty-four (24) hour notification prior to removing any waste from

the site. Waste shall be removed from the site only during hours approved by the Owner

unless otherwise specified. No waste may be taken from the site unless the Contractor and

Environmental Consultant are present and the Environmental Consultant authorizes the release

of the waste as described herein.

C. All waste generated as part of the asbestos project shall be removed from the site within seven

(7) calendar days after successful completion of all asbestos abatement work.

D. Upon arrival at the project site, the Hauler must possess and present to the Environmental

Consultant a valid New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364

Asbestos Hauler's Permit. The Environmental Consultant may verify the authenticity of the

hauler's permit with the proper authority.

E. The Hauler, with the Contractor and the Environmental Consultant, shall inspect all material in

the transport container prior to taking possession and signing the Asbestos Waste Manifests.

4.02 WASTE STORAGE CONTAINERS

A. All waste containers shall be fully enclosed and lockable (i.e. enclosed dumpster, trailer, etc.).

No open containers will be permitted on-site (i.e. open dumpster with canvas cover, etc.)

unless specifically permitted by applicable regulation or a Site Specific Variance. When



100% CD



asbestos contaminated waste must be kept on the work site overnight or longer, it shall be

double bagged and stored in accordance with Federal, State, and local laws.

B. The Environmental Consultant shall verify that the waste storage container and/or truck tags

(license plates) match that listed on the New York State Department of Environmental

Conservation Part 364 Permit. Any container not listed on the permit shall be removed from

the site immediately.

C. The container shall be plasticized and sealed with two (2) layers of 6 mil polyethylene. Once

on site, it shall be kept locked at all times, except during load out. The waste container shall

not be used for storage of equipment or contractor supplies.

D. While on-site, the container shall be labeled with EPA danger signage:

DANGER

CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS

AVOID CREATING DUST

CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD

E. The New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Asbestos Hauler's Permit

number shall be stenciled on both sides and back of the container.

F. The container is not permitted to be loaded unless it is properly plasticized, has the appropriate

danger signage affixed, and has the permit number appropriately stenciled on the container.

G. Waste generated off-site is not permitted to be brought onto the project site and loaded into the

waste container.

H. All asbestos waste removed from the project site shall be transported directly to the disposal

site without any addtional waste being added to the container during transport.

4.03 OWNER’S AND HAULER'S ASBESTOS WASTE MANIFESTS A. An Asbestos Waste Manifest shall be provided by the Hauler for transportation of the waste.

B. The Waste Manifest shall be completed by the Contractor and verified by the Environmental

Consultant that all the information and amounts are accurate and the proper signatures are in

place.

C. The Waste Manifest shall have the appropriate signatures of the Environmental Consultant, the

Contractor, and the Hauler representatives prior to any waste being removed from the site.

D. Copies of the completed Waste Manifest shall be retained by the Environmental Consultant

and the Contractor and shall remain on site for inspection.

E. Upon arrival at the Disposal Site, the Waste Manifest shall be signed by the Disposal Facility

operator to certify receipt of ACM covered by the manifest.

F. The Disposal Facility operator shall return the original Waste Manifest to the Contractor.

G. The Contractor shall forward copies of the Waste Manifest to the Environmental Consultant

within 30 days of the waste container being removed from the site. Failure to do so may result

in payment being withheld from the Contractor.



100% CD



H. All original waste disposal manifests shall be submitted by the Contractor to the

Environmental Consultant with the final close-out documentation.


POMERANTZ ROOF RENOVATION 11 MARCH 2016

100% CD



APPENDIX A

CONTRACTOR’S ACKNOWLEGEMENT STATEMENT


POMERANTZ ROOF RENOVATION 11 MARCH 2016

100% CD



CONTRACTOR’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATEMENT

Re: Abatement of Asbestos Containing Materials

_______________________________________________________________ (Project Title)

_______________________________________________________________ (Project Location)

In consideration of the following individuals’ employment in connection with the abatement,

handling, and disposal of asbestos containing materials at the referenced project, I hereby

certify that the employees: a) have received the medical examinations required by OSHA 29

CFR 1926.1101; b) have been fit tested specifically for respirators used on the Project; and c)

have received training as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 in the proper handling of

asbestos containing materials, including the health implications and risks involved, as well as

the use and limitations of the respiratory equipment to be used.

Employee Name

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

Supervisor Signature

_______________________________________

Notary

Page ____ of ____

Asbestos Certificate Number

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

Supervisor Printed Name

________________________________

________________________________

Title



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 BRICK MASONRY REPAIR

©Westlake Reed Leskosky 040120.63 - 1

SECTION 040120.63 - BRICK MASONRY REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Repairing brick masonry, including replacing units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.

B. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Mortar used to set and anchor masonry in a structure, distinct from

pointing mortar installed after masonry is set in place.

C. Saturation Coefficient: Ratio of the weight of water absorbed during immersion in cold water to

weight absorbed during immersion in boiling water; used as an indication of resistance of

masonry units to freezing and thawing.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to brick masonry repair including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Verify brick masonry repair specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed

to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances.

c. Quality-control program.

d. Coordination with building occupants.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Order sand for colored mortar immediately after approval of mockups. Take delivery of and

store at Project site enough quantity to complete Project.



100% CD



B. Work Sequence: Perform brick masonry repair work in the following sequence, which includes

work specified in this and other Sections:

1. Remove plant growth.

2. Inspect masonry for open mortar joints and point them before cleaning to prevent the

intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall.

3. Remove paint.

4. Clean masonry.

5. Rake out mortar from joints surrounding masonry to be replaced and from joints adjacent

to masonry repairs along joints.

6. Repair masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials.

7. Rake out mortar from joints to be repointed.

8. Point mortar joints.

9. After repairs and repointing have been completed and cured, perform a final cleaning to

remove residues from this work.

10. Where water repellents are to be used on or near masonry work, delay application of

these chemicals until after pointing and cleaning.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include recommendations for product application and use. Include test data substantiating

that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of replacement masonry units on the

structure, showing relation of existing and new or relocated units.

2. Show provisions for expansion joints or other sealant joints.

3. Show provisions for flashing, lighting fixtures, conduits, and weep holes as required.

4. Show locations of scaffolding and points of scaffolding in contact with masonry. Include

details of each point of contact or anchorage.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Colored Mortar: Submit sets of mortar that will be left exposed in the form of sample

mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/4 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.

a. Have each set contain a close color range of at least three Samples of different

mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching existing,

cleaned mortar when cured and dry.

b. Submit with precise measurements on ingredients, proportions, gradations, and

source of colored sands from which each Sample was made.

2. Sand Types Used for Mortar: Minimum 8 oz. of each in plastic screw-top jars.



100% CD



3. Patching Compound: Submit sets of patching compound Samples in the form of plugs

(patches in drilled holes) in sample units of masonry representative of the range of

masonry colors on the building.


mixes of patching compound that matches the variations in existing masonry when

cured and dry.

4. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.


A. Qualification Data: For brick masonry repair specialist.

B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For existing masonry units and mortar and replacement masonry

units.

C. Quality-control program.


A. Brick Masonry Repair Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced brick masonry repair

firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service

performance. Experience in only installing masonry is insufficient experience for masonry

repair work.

1. Field Supervision: Brick masonry repair specialist firm shall maintain experienced full-

time supervisors on Project site during times that brick masonry repair work is in

progress.

B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of brick masonry repair to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set

quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation.

1. Masonry Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of masonry repair work performed.

If not otherwise indicated, size each mockup not smaller than two adjacent whole units or

approximately 48 inches in least dimension. Construct sample areas in locations in

existing walls where directed by Architect unless otherwise indicated. Demonstrate

quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work. Include the

following as a minimum:

a. Replacement: Four brick units replaced.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.



100% CD



1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver masonry units to Project site strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-

duty cartons and protected against impact and chipping.

B. Deliver packaged materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers,

labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products.

C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp.

D. Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if

containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days.

E. Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

F. Handle masonry units to prevent overstressing, chipping, defacement, and other damage.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit brick masonry repair work to be performed according to product

manufacturers' written instructions and specified requirements.

B. Temperature Limits, General: Repair masonry units only when air temperature is between 40

and 90 deg F and is predicted to remain so for at least seven days after completion of the Work

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair unless

otherwise indicated:

1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, masonry repair

materials, and existing masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120

deg F.

2. When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to

maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for seven days after repair.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect masonry repairs when temperature and humidity conditions

produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and repair materials. Provide artificial

shade and wind breaks, and use cooled materials as required to minimize evaporation. Do not

apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above unless otherwise indicated.

E. For manufactured repair materials, perform work within the environmental limits set by each

manufacturer.



100% CD



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for repairing brick masonry (brick, cement,

sand, etc.) from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.

2.2 MASONRY MATERIALS

A. Face Brick: As required to complete brick masonry repair work.

1. Brick Matching Existing: Units with colors, color variation within units, surface texture,

size, and shape that match existing brickwork.

a. For existing brickwork that exhibits a range of colors or color variation within

units, provide brick that proportionally matches that range and variation rather than

brick that matches an individual color within that range.

2. Tolerances as Fabricated: According to tolerance requirements in ASTM C 216,

Type FBS.

2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for

cold-weather construction; white or gray, or both where required for color matching of mortar.

1. Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according

to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.

1. Exposed Mortar: Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as

possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.

2. Colored Mortar: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color

necessary to produce required mortar color.

D. Water: Potable.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Setting Buttons and Shims: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to masonry, sized to suit joint

thicknesses and bed depths of masonry units, less the required depth of pointing materials

unless removed before pointing.



100% CD



B. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material; compatible with mortar, joint primers,

sealants, and surfaces adjacent to joints; and that easily comes off entirely, including adhesive.

C. Other Products: Select materials and methods of use based on the following, subject to approval

of a mockup:

1. Previous effectiveness in performing the work involved.

2. Minimal possibility of damaging exposed surfaces.

3. Consistency of each application.

4. Uniformity of the resulting overall appearance.

5. Do not use products or tools that could leave residue on surfaces.

2.5 MORTAR MIXES

A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by

volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in

a clean, mechanical batch mixer.

B. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter

specified proportions without Architect's approval.

C. Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mixes: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:

1. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Type: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N

unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and

lime.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces.

1. Cover sills, ledges, and other projecting items to protect them from mortar droppings.

2. Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and repair work to discourage mortar from

adhering.

3. Immediately remove mortar splatters in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.

3.2 MASONRY REPAIR, GENERAL

A. Appearance Standard: Repaired surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20

feet away by Architect.



100% CD



3.3 BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. At locations indicated, remove bricks as required for installation of new flashing. Carefully

remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner that

permits replacement with full-size units.

1. When removing single bricks, remove material from center of brick and work toward

outside edges.

B. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area.

C. Maintain reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged

condition. Coordinate with new flashing, which is specified in other Sections.

D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose

units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

E. Clean masonry surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in

preparation for brick replacement.

F. Replace removed damaged brick with new brick matching existing brick.

G. Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is

required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.

1. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints.

2. Use setting buttons or shims to set units accurately spaced with uniform joints.

H. Lay replacement brick with rebuilding (setting) mortar and with completely filled bed, head,

and collar joints. Butter ends with enough mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet

both replacement and surrounding bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption

(suction) of more than 30 g/30 sq. in. per min. Use wetting methods that ensure that units are

nearly saturated but surface is dry when laid.

1. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing

brickwork.

2. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets according to Section 040120.64

"Brick Masonry Repointing." Point at same time as repointing of surrounding area.

3. When mortar is hard enough to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering

with pointing of joints.

I. Curing: Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive

hours, including weekends and holidays.

1. Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is

unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.



100% CD



3.4 FINAL CLEANING

A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar

and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water applied by

low-pressure spray.

1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.

2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.

B. Clean adjacent nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.

C. Clean mortar and debris from roof; remove debris from drains. Rinse off roof and flush drains.

D. Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Architect's Project Representatives: Architect will assign Project representatives to help carry

out Architect's responsibilities at the site, including observing progress and quality of portion of

the Work completed. Allow Architect's Project representatives use of lift devices and

scaffolding, as needed, to observe progress and quality of portion of the Work completed.

B. Notify Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices and scaffolding

will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until Architect's Project

representatives have had reasonable opportunity to make inspections and observations of work

areas at lift device or scaffold location.

3.6 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Masonry Waste: Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 040120.63



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 BRICK MASONRY REPOINTING


SECTION 040120.64 - BRICK MASONRY REPOINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Repointing joints with mortar.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowances for repointing brick masonry are specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."

1.4 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."

1. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances.

2. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change

Orders.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.



1. Review methods and procedures related to repointing brick masonry including, but not


a. Verify brick masonry repointing specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities

needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances.

c. Quality-control program.

d. Coordination with building occupants.



100% CD



1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Order sand for pointing mortar immediately after approval of mockups. Take delivery of and

store at Project site enough quantity to complete Project.

B. Work Sequence: Perform brick masonry repointing work in the following sequence, which

includes work specified in this and other Sections:

1. Remove plant growth.

2. Inspect masonry for open mortar joints and permanently or temporarily point them before

cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall.

3. Remove paint.

4. Clean masonry.

5. Rake out mortar from joints surrounding masonry to be replaced and from joints adjacent

to masonry repairs along joints.

6. Repair masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials.

7. Rake out mortar from joints to be repointed.

8. Point mortar joints.

9. After repairs and repointing have been completed and cured, perform a final cleaning to

remove residues from this work.

10. Where water repellents are to be used on or near masonry work, delay application of

these chemicals until after pointing and cleaning.

C. As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in

masonry units according to Section 040120.63 "Brick Masonry Repair." Patch holes in mortar

joints according to "Repointing Masonry" Article.





2. Include recommendations for product application and use. Include test data substantiating

that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of repointing work on the structure.

2. Show provisions for expansion joints or other sealant joints.

3. Show locations of scaffolding and points of scaffolding in contact with masonry. Include

details of each point of contact or anchorage.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Pointing Mortar: Submit sets of mortar for pointing in the form of sample mortar strips, 6

inches long by 1/4 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.



100% CD




mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching existing,

cleaned mortar when cured and dry.

b. Submit with precise measurements on ingredients, proportions, gradations, and

source of colored sands from which each Sample was made.

2. Sand Type Used for Pointing Mortar: Minimum 8 oz. of each in plastic screw-top jars.

3. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.


A. Qualification Data: For brick masonry repointing specialist.

B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For existing mortar.

C. Quality-control program.


A. Brick Masonry Repointing Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced brick masonry

repointing firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-

service performance. Experience in only installing masonry is insufficient experience for

masonry repointing work.

1. Field Supervision: Brick masonry repointing specialist firms shall maintain experienced

full-time supervisors on Project site during times that brick masonry repointing work is in

progress.

B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of brick masonry repointing to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to

set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Repointing: Rake out joints in two separate areas, each approximately 36 inches high by

48 inches wide for each type of repointing required, and repoint one of the areas.



in writing.



1.11 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

testing on masonry units as follows:

1. Provide test specimens as indicated and representative of proposed materials and existing

construction.



100% CD



2. Existing Mortar: Test according to ASTM C 295/C 295M, modified as agreed by testing

service and Architect for Project requirements, to determine proportional composition of

original ingredients, sizes and colors of aggregates, and approximate strength.


A. Deliver packaged materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers,

labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if

containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days.

D. Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.



conditions permit repointing work to be performed according to product manufacturers' written

instructions and specified requirements.

B. Temperature Limits, General: Repoint mortar joints only when air temperature is between 40

and 90 deg F and is predicted to remain so for at least seven days after completion of the Work


C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for mortar-joint pointing

unless otherwise indicated:

1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients and existing masonry

walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F.

2. When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to

maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for seven days after pointing.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect mortar-joint pointing when temperature and humidity

conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar materials. Provide artificial

shade and wind breaks, and use cooled materials as required to minimize evaporation. Do not

apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above unless otherwise indicated.



100% CD



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for repointing brick masonry (cement, sand,

etc.) from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance

and physical properties.

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for

cold-weather construction; white or gray, or both where required for color matching of mortar.

1. Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according

to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.

1. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend

several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.

2. Color: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to

produce required mortar color.

D. Water: Potable.


A. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material; compatible with mortar, joint primers, and

surfaces adjacent to joints; and that easily comes off entirely, including adhesive.

B. Other Products: Select materials and methods of use based on the following, subject to approval

of a mockup:

1. Previous effectiveness in performing the work involved.

2. Minimal possibility of damaging exposed surfaces.

3. Consistency of each application.

4. Uniformity of the resulting overall appearance.

5. Do not use products or tools that could leave residue on surfaces.

2.4 MORTAR MIXES

A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by

volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in

a clean, mechanical batch mixer.



100% CD



1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together

before adding any water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp,

unworkable mix that retains its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this

dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until

mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not

retemper or use partially hardened material.

B. Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mixes: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:

1. Pointing Mortar by Type: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N unless

otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and lime.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces.

1. Cover sills, ledges, and other projecting items to protect them from mortar droppings.

2. Keep wall area wet below pointing work to discourage mortar from adhering.

3. Immediately remove mortar splatters in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.

3.2 MASONRY REPOINTING, GENERAL

A. Appearance Standard: Repointed surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20

feet away by Architect.

3.3 REPOINTING MASONRY

A. Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent:

1. Joints at locations of the following defects:

a. Holes and missing mortar.

b. Cracks that can be penetrated 1/4 inch or more by a knife blade 0.027 inch thick.

c. Cracks 1/8 inch or more in width and of any depth.

d. Hollow-sounding joints when tapped by metal object.

e. Eroded surfaces 1/4 inch or more deep.

f. Deterioration to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without tools.

g. Joints filled with substances other than mortar.

B. Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required.

C. Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup:



100% CD



1. Remove mortar from joints to depth of 2 times joint width, but not less than 3/4 inch or

not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Do not remove unsound

mortar more than 2 inches deep; consult Architect for direction.

2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with

square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or

flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.

3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry

units as directed by Architect.

D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks,

loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.

E. Pointing with Mortar:

1. Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing

application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If

rinse water dries, dampen joint surfaces before pointing.

2. Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater

than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 1/4 inch until a uniform depth is

formed. Fully compact each layer, and allow it to become thumbprint hard before

applying next layer.

3. After deep areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point joints by

placing mortar in layers not greater than 1/4 inch. Fully compact each layer and allow to

become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing masonry units have

worn or rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of masonry to

avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint edges onto

exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge the mortar.

4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as

demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by

brushing.

5. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive

hours, including weekends and holidays.

6. Hairline cracking within mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable.

Completely remove such mortar and repoint.

F. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least

30 days before beginning cleaning work.

3.4 FINAL CLEANING

A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar

and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water applied by

low-pressure spray.

1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.

2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.

B. Clean adjacent nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.



100% CD



C. Clean mortar and debris from roof; remove debris from drains. Rinse off roof and flush drains.

D. Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.


A. Architect's Project Representatives: Architect will assign Project representatives to help carry

out Architect's responsibilities at the site, including observing progress and quality of portion of

the Work completed. Allow Architect's Project representatives use of lift devices and

scaffolding, as needed, to observe progress and quality of portion of the Work completed.

B. Notify Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices and scaffolding

will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until Architect's Project

representatives have had reasonable opportunity to make inspections and observations of work

areas at lift device or scaffold location.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING


SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal framing at roof as detailed on structural drawings.





B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;

fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,

bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining

work.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and

witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1. Steel sheet.

2. Mechanical fasteners.

3. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.



100% CD




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating

steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile

strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design

loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated,

framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200.

2.2 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and

coating designation as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H.

2. Coating: G60.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: As indicated on structural drawings.

B. Steel Track: As indicated on structural drawings.

C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: As indicated on structural drawings.

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H,

metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.



100% CD



2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if

visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design

load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel framing to structure.

2. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy

Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping,

steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,

manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members as indicated on structural drawings. Wire

tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws

penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection

stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable

variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from

plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of

sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-

square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



100% CD



B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field

assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's

written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting

structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush,

even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between

fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members as indicated on structural drawings.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with

requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track

or tension members.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame

both sides of joints.

G. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly

members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are

inaccessible on completion of framing work.

H. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved

or standard punched openings.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable

tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan

location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing

or other finishing materials.



100% CD




A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

C. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time

of Substantial Completion.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 METAL FABRICATIONS


SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal ladders.

2. Ladder safety cages.

3. Steel fence post bracing and supports.


1. Section 055213 “Pipe and Tube Railings” for galvanized steel railings.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Metal ladders.

2. Ladder safety cages.

3. Steel fence post bracing and supports.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, safety cages, fence post bracing and supports,

including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for

their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.



100% CD




A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design ladders, safety cages, fence post bracing and supports.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,

overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use.

Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 2.

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=31




100% CD



C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,

where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being

fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the

load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in

concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified

independent testing agency.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Chemical anchors.

1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2

stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed

surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.



100% CD



G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,

and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work.

B. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.7 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Provide ladder details and configuration as indicated on drawings.

2. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material

metallically bonded to rung.

3. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets.

2.8 LADDER SAFETY CAGES

A. General:

1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with

stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet o.c.

Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches o.c. between

primary hoops.

3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with

stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:

1. Provide ladder safety cage details and configuration as indicated on drawings

2. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=8919&mf=04&src=wd




100% CD



2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into

surrounding surface.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and

levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:





4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for

use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and

other connectors.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS


SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe railings.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Railing brackets.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,

posts, and balusters.

2. Fittings and brackets.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.



100% CD



C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.

D. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing

agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

E. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under

conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.



100% CD



C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller

marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as

supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to

finished wall surface.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless

another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel

fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

2. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture,

of railings.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and

class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of

construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to

6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when

installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by

a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2

stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.





100% CD




A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy

welded.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to

support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units

for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of

joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed

surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide

weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.




3. Remove flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.

Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

J. Form Changes in Direction as Follows:

1. As detailed.



100% CD



K. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each

repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend

without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

L. Close exposed ends of railing members with end fittings.

M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and

anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

O. Provide anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate

anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage

devices with supporting structure.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.

2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.

3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

4. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain

as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and

other ferrous components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in

location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished

after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means

without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.



100% CD



D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for

securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.

Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is

performed in the shop or in the field.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than

required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2

inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint

within 6 inches of post.

3.3 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Install stainless steel threaded rod into existing masonry with epoxy anchor. Bolt galvanized

steel post support plate to existing masonry as indicated on drawings.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial

Completion.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 ROUGH CARPENTRY


SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking and nailers.

2. Wood shims.

3. Plywood panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal

size in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate

type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of

treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit

stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the

ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.



100% CD




A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of each new assembly, including the following:

a. Skylight curb.

b. Mechanical Penthouse edge.

c. Stair Bulkhead edge.

d. Short framed wall.

e. Tower edge without gutter.



in writing.




A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air

circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely

anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is

indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC

Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to

inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in

contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.





100% CD



1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board

of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members

in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry

or concrete.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber

of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will

interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots

capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.4 PLYWOOD PANELS

A. Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not

indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements

specified in this article for material and manufacture.



100% CD



1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of

high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Drive Anchors: 3/8" diameter, stainless steel, length to penetrate min. 2" into concrete, trade

name Spike, as manufactured by Powers Fastening, Inc., or approved equal.

E. Threaded Rods: diameter and length as indicated, min. l/2" diameter where not indicated,

stainless steel, furnished with stainless steel nuts.

F. Epoxy Adhesive: Two-part injection anchoring system, brand designation T308+ Epoxy, as

manufactured by Powers Fastening, Inc., or approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame

Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and

fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar

supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood panels by fastening to studs.

D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim.

E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with

function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or

optimum joint arrangement.

F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated

lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

G. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.



100% CD



H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC).

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-

Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

I. Use minimum 6D steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that

will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive

finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting

wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

J. At framed curb, roof edge, and short wall assemblies, end wood blocking lengths and plywood

sheets on studs.

K. Install fasteners within 3 inches of ends of wood blocking lengths, and at spacing indicated

between ends.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated

and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other

work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces





100% CD

WRL #15073.00 SHEATHING


SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof curb sheathing.



materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.

Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL SHEATHING

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C 1325, Type A.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Custom Building Products.

b. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: As indicated.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11960

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457016588





100% CD

WRL #15073.00 SHEATHING


2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof curb sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Screws for Fastening Sheathing to Wood Framing: ASTM C 1002.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to

use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces

do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting

construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code.

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-

Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials

are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through

completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of

structural support elements.

F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so

sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is

forecast.

3.2 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written

instructions for type of application indicated.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY


SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior millwork at skylight locations.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not

exposed to view.

2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish

carpentry.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.



materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application

details.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of

treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or

textures.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. For each panel product with nonfactory-applied finish, with half of exposed surface

finished, 8 by 10 inches for panels.



100% CD




A. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated wood, from ICC-ES.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air

circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely

anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions comply with

requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored

in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions comply with

requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until

building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and

HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy

levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: For applications indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article

that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and comply with testing requirements;

testing will be conducted by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated MDF: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested

according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test

is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet

beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.





100% CD



C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Application: All interior MDF.

2.3 INTERIOR MILLWORK

A. Panel Products for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish): Fabricated to dimensions indicated on

drawings.

1. Material: Fire-retardant-treated MDF.


A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,

material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed

where possible.

B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for

general carpentry use.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Ease edges less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch

or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture

damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in

installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by

manufacturer.





100% CD




A. Do not use materials that are unsound; warped; improperly treated or finished; inadequately

seasoned; too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements; or with defective surfaces,

sizes, or patterns.

B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use

concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as

recommended by manufacturer.

2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand


3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior

finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch

maximum offset for reveal installation.

4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.

Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish

carpentry.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior

finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no

evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or

soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes if any.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING


SECTION 070150.19 - PREPARATION FOR REROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Full tear-off of roof areas indicated.

2. Removal of base flashings.

3. Removal of other roofing-related components as indicated.

4. Temporary roofing.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.

2. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and

environmental-protection measures for reroofing preparation.

3. Section 024119 “Selective Demolition” for removal and reinstallation of existing rooftop

equipment.

4. Section 028200 “Asbestos Abatement” for removal and disposal of asbestos containing

materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.

B. Full Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing roofing system from deck.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details.

C. Temporary Roofing Submittal: Product data and description of temporary roofing system.

Include surface preparation requirements needed to receive other components of the roofing

system.



100% CD




A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site

improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as

having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's special warranty.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency

representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer, including

project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with

or affects reroofing, including installers of roof deck, roof accessories, and roof-mounted

equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and replacement,

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written

instructions.

b. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components that

are to remain.

c. Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of reroofing, and roof-

drain plugging and plug removal.

d. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

e. Existing roof deck conditions requiring notification of Architect.

f. Existing roof deck removal procedures and Owner notifications.

g. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for

reuse.

h. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing.

i. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs,

and condition of other construction that affect reroofing.

j. HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes.

k. Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems.

l. Asbestos removal and discovery of asbestos-containing materials.

m. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.

n. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding.



100% CD




A. Existing Roofing System: As indicated on drawings, generally consisting of the following

layers:

1. Stone ballast.

2. EPDM membrane and flashing.

3. Lightweight insulated concrete.

4. Built-up asphalt membrane and flashing.

5. Asphaltic-perlite granular mix.

6. Multi-ply base sheet.

B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct reroofing

so Owner's operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' notice of

activities that may affect Owner's operations.

1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust and

water-leakage covers over sensitive equipment and furnishings, shut down HVAC and

fire-alarm or -detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below work

area.

C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior

plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.

D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

E. Limit construction live loads on roof to 20 psf. Do not stockpile material on roof.

F. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted

weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or

building.

1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day.

G. Hazardous Materials: A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and

use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

except according to procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

3. Coordinate reroofing preparation with hazardous material remediation to prevent water

from entering existing roofing system or building.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing roofing system

warranty. Notify warrantor before proceeding.



100% CD



1. Notify warrantor of existing adjacent roofing system on completion of reroofing, and

obtain documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and

warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION MATERIALS

A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation: ASTM C 578.

B. Plywood: DOC PS1, Grade CD Exposure 1.

C. OSB: DOC PS2, Exposure 1.

2.2 TEMPORARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Base Sheet at Concrete Deck: Random fibrous glass mat impregnated and coated with specially

formulated, flexible, modified asphalt; torchable.

1. Nominal Thickness: 110 mils.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast Irex

40.

B. Base Sheet at Wood Deck (Tower Roof): Random fibrous glass mat impregnated and coated

with specially formulated, high quality, oxidized asphalt.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast

Parabase.

C. Cover Ply at Wood Deck (Tower Roof): Lightweight random fibrous glass mat, impregnated

and coated with high quality SBS modified bitumen.


Paradiene 20.

D. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41 Type II.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast PA-

917 LS Primer.

E. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two-

part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with

roofing membrane.


311 M Adhesive.

F. Base Sheet Fastener:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast PA

Roofing Fastener.



100% CD



2.3 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Use auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing system

manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of existing and new roofing

system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Where required, shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work.

B. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately notify

Architect of any blockages or restrictions.

C. Protect existing roofing system that is not to be reroofed.

1. Loosely lay 1-inch-minimum thick, expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation over existing

roofing in areas indicated. Loosely lay 15/32-inch plywood or OSB panels over EPS.

Extend EPS past edges of plywood or OSB panels a minimum of 1 inch.

2. Provide (3) 50 lb. bag of removed stone ballast per plywood (or OSB) sheet.

3. Temporarily relocate existing vegetated roof trays from the area of temporary protection

indicated on the plan. Reinstall after temporary protection is removed.

4. Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing roofing that have been protected.

5. Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has been

completed. Remove temporary protection on completion of reroofing.

D. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover

air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or

activate smoke detectors in the ductwork.

E. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid

installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.

F. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday.

Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs

specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when

no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.

1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or

partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove

water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or under existing roofing

system components.

3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF

A. General: Notify Owner each day of location/area of roof tear-off proposed for that day.



100% CD



B. Remove aggregate ballast from roofing. Reuse as indicated for ballasting of temporary

protection boards.

C. Full Roof Tear-Off: Where indicated, remove existing roofing and other roofing system

components down to the deck.

1. Remove stone ballast, lightweight insulated concrete, fiber cant, asphaltic-perlite granular

mix, and base sheet.

2. Remove wood blocking, curbs, and nailers.

3. Remove flashing and coping as indicated.

3.3 DECK PREPARATION

A. Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system.

B. Verify that concrete and wood substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.

C. If deck surface is unsuitable for receiving new roofing or if structural integrity of deck is

suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by

Architect.

D. Repair Tower wood decking as required, in accordance with the Unit Price.

3.4 INFILL MATERIALS INSTALLATION

A. Immediately after roof tear-off, and inspection and repair, if needed, of deck, fill in tear-off

areas as directed.

B. Install new roofing patch over roof infill area. If new roofing is installed the same day tear-off is

made, roofing patch is not required.

3.5 TEMPORARY ROOFING

A. General: Install temporary roofing over area to be reroofed. Maintain temporary roof until

completion of removals of existing materials in each distinct roof area. Roof areas have

existing concrete deck unless noted, are defined on drawings, and are generally identified as

follows:

1. Stair Bulkhead Roof.

2. Equipment Penthouse Roof.

3. Tower Roof – wood deck.

4. Three Main Roof sections, divided by short framed walls to enable tapered insulation

layout.

5. Two Extension Roof sections, divided by short framed walls to enable tapered insulation

layout.

B. At concrete deck, torch-install temporary roofing in two increments:

1. Prime concrete deck and adjacent vertical substrates to which base sheet shall be applied.



100% CD



2. First increment of installation of base sheet to horizontal deck surface.

3. Second increment of installation of base sheet onto bottom 16 inches of adjoining vertical

surface and extending 4 inches onto and adhered to horizontal base sheet. Base flashing

shall be spliced to adjoining Penthouse roof, and extend down onto top course of Tower

siding and securely fastened against displacement and damage.

C. At wood deck, install temporary roofing as follows:

1. Fasten base sheet to horizontal wood deck surface. Fastener locations and frequency

shall conform to specified wind rating requirements and roofing manufacturer’s

directions.

2. Adhere cover ply to base sheet with cold-applied adhesive.

3. Second increment of installation of base sheet onto bottom 6 inches of adjoining vertical

surface and extending 4 inches onto and adhered to horizontal cover ply.

3.6 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL

A. Remove existing base flashings. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt, sheet

materials, dirt, and debris.

B. Existing cap flashing may be used as part of temporary watertightness system. Remove existing

cap flashings and portions of base sheet above cants as indicated, as part of installation of new

roofing components above base sheet.

C. Replace parapet framing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers as indicated to comply with

Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

3.7 DISPOSAL

A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished

materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted.

B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 TRAFFIC COATINGS


SECTION 071800 - TRAFFIC COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications:

1. Pedestrian traffic.

2. Equipment-room floor.





1. Include installation instructions and details, material descriptions, dry or wet film

thickness requirements, and finish.

B. Shop Drawings: For traffic coatings.

1. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and

other termination conditions that are not included in manufacturer's product data.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on rigid backing.

1. Provide stepped Samples on backing to illustrate buildup of traffic coatings.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of traffic coating.



100% CD



C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup for each traffic coating and substrate to receive traffic coatings.

2. Size: 200 sq. ft. of each substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack

treatment, thickness, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.



in writing.




A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate

temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp

or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F, when relative humidity exceeds 85

percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.

B. Do not install traffic coating until items that penetrate membrane have been installed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coating that fails in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Adhesive or cohesive failures.

b. Abrasion or tearing failures.

c. Surface crazing or spalling.

d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck

substrate.

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.



100% CD



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain traffic coatings from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain primary traffic-coating materials, including primers, from traffic-coating

manufacturer. Obtain accessory materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint

sealants, and substrate repair materials of types and from sources recommended in

writing by primary material manufacturer.


A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base coat, intermediate coat, and topcoat; and

accessory materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of

service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.3 TRAFFIC COATING

A. Traffic Coating: Manufacturer's standard reinforced, traffic-bearing, seamless, high-solids-

content, cold liquid-applied, elastomeric, water-resistant membrane system with integral

wearing surface for pedestrian traffic and equipment-room floor; according to

ASTM C 957/C 957M.


Reinforced Terapro Waterproofing System.

B. Primer: PMMA-based primers as recommended in writing for substrate and conditions by

traffic-coating manufacturer.

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast Pro

Primer T for horizontal substrates and Siplast Pro Primer W for vertical substrates.

C. Waterproofing and Wear Layer: Liquid-applied membrane consisting of a multi-component,

fast curing PMMA resin and a natural-colored, crushed quartz aggregate.

1. PMMA Resin Waterproofing Layer: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide Siplast Terapro Base Resin.

2. PMMA Resin Wear Layer: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Siplast Terapro VTS Resin.

3. Crushed Quartz Aggregate: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Siplast Terapro VTS Quartz Filler.

D. Membrane Reinforcement Layer: Non-woven, 40 mil, needle-punched polyester fabric

reinforcement.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast Pro

Fleece.





100% CD



E. Aggregate: natural-colored, high purity silica of particle sizes, shape, and minimum hardness

recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.


Natural Quartz.

2. Color as selected by Architect from standard range.

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic-coating materials with the fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products according to test method below for

deck type and slopes indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency that is

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Class A roof covering according to ASTM E 108.


A. Catalyst: Reactive agent used to induce curing of PMMA resins.


Catalyst.

B. Cleaning Solution: Clear solvent for cleaning and preparation of transition areas and substrate

materials to receive PMMA resins.


Prep.

C. Repair Mortar: High-density, multi-component, fast curing PMMA resin-based mortar, for

patching of concrete surfaces prior to membrane installation.


Mortar.

D. Preparation Paste: High performance multi-component, fast curing PMMA resin-based paste,

for remediation of depressions in substrate surfaces prior to membrane installation.


Paste Resin.

E. Joint Sealants: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Flashing: Recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer, consisting of a high

performance, multi-component flexible PMMA resin, and a non-woven, needle-punched

polyester fabric reinforcement.

1. PMMA Resin: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide Siplast Terapro Flashing Resin.

2. Fabric Reinforcement: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Siplast Pro Fleece.

G. Adhesive: Recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

H. Reinforcing Strip: Recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.



100% CD



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content, surface smoothness, and other conditions

affecting performance of traffic-coating work.

B. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.

1. Test for moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

2. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by traffic-coating

manufacturer.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

traffic-coating work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written

instructions to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic-coating application. Remove

projections, fill voids, and seal joints if any, as recommended in writing by traffic-coating

manufacturer.

B. Priming: Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, prime substrates

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by traffic-coating material on same day.

Reprime areas exposed for more time than recommended by manufacturer.

C. Schedule preparation work so dust and other contaminants from process do not fall on wet,

newly coated surfaces.

D. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings to prevent overspray, spillage, leaking,

and migration of coatings. Prevent traffic-coating materials from entering deck substrate

penetrations and clogging weep holes and drains.

E. Concrete Substrates: Scarify concrete floor surfaces and adjoining wall bases to Concrete

Surface Profile CSP 2-4. Do not acid etch.

1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.

2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.

3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-

release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.



100% CD



4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces

according to ASTM D 4258.

3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS

A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings

and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, deck-to-wall butt

joints.

C. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip.

D. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and wall

substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

E. Prepare and install flashings on vertical concrete and concrete block surfaces extending up 8

inches from the adjoining floor surface.

3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT

A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and

manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from

joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.

B. Apply reinforcing strip in traffic-coating system where recommended in writing by traffic-

coating manufacturer.

3.5 TRAFFIC-COATING APPLICATION

A. Apply traffic coating according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply coats of specified compositions for each type of traffic coating at locations as indicated

on Drawings.

C. Start traffic-coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

D. Verify that wet-film thickness of each coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft..

E. Uniformly broadcast and embed aggregate in each coat indicated to receive aggregate according

to manufacturer's written instructions. After coat dries, sweep away excess aggregate.

F. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated;

omit aggregate on vertical surfaces.



100% CD



G. Cure traffic coatings. Prevent contamination and damage during coating application and curing.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 THERMAL INSULATION


SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Glass-fiber blanket.

2. Water-repellent mineral-wool blanket.

3. Section 072119 "Foamed-in-Place Insulation" for spray-applied polyurethane foam

insulation.




A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced, High Density: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-

spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Owens

Corning High Density EcoTouch Insulation or comparable product by one of the

following:








100% CD



a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Guardian Building Products, Inc.

c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

d. Knauf Insulation.

2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS

A. Water-Repellent Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without

membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion

characteristics.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC).

b. Roxul Inc.

c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread

and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections

capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,

rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill

voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

















100% CD



D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,

and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or

required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following

requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a

snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as

follows:

a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of

adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is

installed over it.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required

to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum

volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and

other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse

and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after

installation.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION


SECTION 072119 - FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Closed-cell spray polyurethane foam.


1. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for foam-plastic board insulation.





B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Evaluation Reports: For spray-applied polyurethane foam-plastic insulation, from [ICC-ES]

<Insert applicable model code organization>.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.



100% CD



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLOSED-CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM

A. Closed-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam: ASTM C 1029, Type II, minimum density of 2.4 and

minimum aged R-value at 1-inch thickness of 7.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Icynene Inc.;

ICYNENE MD-C-200v3.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 300 or less.

3. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.


A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of

insulation to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to

comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be

insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Spray insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated and fill voids.

C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by manufacturer.

Do not spray into rising foam.

D. Framed Construction: Install into cavities formed by framing members to achieve thickness

indicated on Drawings.







100% CD



E. Cavity Walls: Install into cavities to fully fill void.

F. Miscellaneous Voids: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and

other causes.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 FLUID-APPLIED REINFORCED MEMBRANE ROOFING


SECTION 075556 - FLUID-APPLIED REINFORCED MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Tapered polyisocyanurate insulation, adhesive installed.

2. Cover board, adhesive installed.

3. Reinforced, fluid-applied membrane roofing system: roofing membrane, base flashing,

stripping.

4. Walkway pads.

5. Overburden components.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

2. Section 070150.19 “Preparation for Reroofing” for removal of existing roof system and

installation of base sheet as temporary roof.

3. Section 075900 “Leak Detection System” for leak monitoring and detecting components

installed below and above membrane.

4. Section 077100 “Roof Specialties” for coping and roof edge systems produced by roofing

manufacturer and included in roofing manufacturer’s full system warranty.

5. Section 077273 “Vegetated Roof Systems” for vegetated roof system and accessories.

6. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and cap

flashings.

7. Section 077129 "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for manufactured roof expansion-

joint assemblies.

8. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

9. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



100% CD



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and

installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof

accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's


3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing during and after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments

to other work.

1. Show locations, extent, and details of roof pavers.

C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products:

1. Flashing material, of color required.

2. Aggregate ballast in gradation and color indicated. Provide 20 lbs. of stone, showing full

mix of colors and sizes, and with quarry identified.

3. Roof paver in each color and texture required.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by manufacturer and


D. Manufacturer’s field quality-control inspection reports and final roof inspection report,

submitted within two working days of inspection.



100% CD



E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranty and for installer’s special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's warranty.

B. Mockup: Install roofing on 100 sq. ft. of deck to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and

crack treatment, thickness of roofing, and execution quality. Install drainage mat, fabric mat,

insulation, stone ballast and roof pavers over roofing membrane.




A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled

with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or

listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid significant or

permanent damage to deck or structural supporting members.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply roofing within the range of ambient and substrate

temperatures recommended by roofing system manufacturer. Do not apply roofing to a damp or

wet substrate or when temperature is below zero deg F.

1. Do not apply roofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. No-Dollar-Limit Labor and Material Full System Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.



100% CD



1. Warranty also includes base flashings, insulation, roof pavers, and all other components

of roofing system.

2. Warranty also includes coping and roof edge systems produced by roofing manufacturer

and specified in Section 077100 “Roof Specialties.”

3. Warranty also includes removal and restoration of overburden for investigation and repair

of deficiencies covered by warranty.


B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this

Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing

system such as base flashing, board insulation, roof pavers and stone ballast for the following

warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain roofing materials, sheet flashings and insulation from single source

from single manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift

pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and

base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent

materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing

manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. FM Global Listing: Roofing, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with

requirements in FM Global 4470 as part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Global's

"RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with

FM Global markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes

indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.



100% CD



2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. General: Roofing membrane assembly shall consist of one roll ply of a prefabricated,

reinforced, homogeneous SBS-modified asphalt sheet applied over a prepared substrate,

covered with a fluid-applied, flexible, 90 mil. thick monolithic PMMA-based membrane formed

by the combination of liquid PMMA resin and fleece fabric.


Paradiene 20 P base ply and Parapro Roof System.

B. Roll Ply: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass

fibers), with surface suitable for application of fluid-applied membrane.


Paradiene 20 P.

2. Thickness: 90 mil nominal.

C. PMMA Resin: Flexible, multi-component, fast curing PMMA resin, white color.


Parapro Roof Membrane Resin.

D. Fleece Fabric: Non-woven, needle-punched polyester fabric reinforcement, designed for

compatibility with PMMA resin.


Fleece.

2.4 BASE FLASHING AND STRIPPING MATERIALS

A. General: Base flashing and stripping assembly shall consist of one roll ply of a prefabricated,

reinforced, homogeneous SBS-modified asphalt sheet applied over a prepared substrate,

covered with a fluid-applied, flexible, 90 mil. thick PMMA monolithic membrane formed by

the combination of liquid PMMA resin and fleece fabric.

B. Roll Ply: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass

fibers), with surface suitable for application of fluid-applied membrane.


Paradiene 20 P.

2. Thickness: 90 mil nominal.

C. Roll Ply for Installation on Wood Flashing Substrates:


Paradiene 20 SA.

D. PMMA Flashing Resin: High performance, multi-component, flexible PMMA resin for use in

flashing system, white color.


Parapro Flashing Resin.

E. Fleece for Flashing Reinforcement: Non-woven, needle-punched polyester fabric reinforcement,

designed for compatibility with PMMA flashing resin.



100% CD




Fleece.

F. PMMA Resin Paste: High performance, multi-component, fast curing PMMA resin paste; used

for remediation of depressions in substrate surfaces or other irregularities prior to application of

flashing system.


Paste Resin.

G. Primer for Wood Flashing Substrates:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast TA-

119 Primer.

2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing manufacturer for intended use and

compatible with roofing membrane.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M, Type II.


917 LS Primer.

C. Roll Ply Membrane Adhesive: Roof system manufacturer’s standard notched-squeegee applied,

single component solvent-free modified asphalt adhesive formulated for compatibility and use

with roll ply membrane.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast SFT

Adhesive.

D. Catalyst: Reactive agent used to induce curing of PMMA resins.


Catalyst.

E. Walkway Pads:


Paratread and Siplast PA-1021 Plastic Cement.

2.6 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing manufacturer,

selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated.

B. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, fiber-

reinforced felt facer on both major surfaces.


Paratherm Polyisocyanurate Insulation.





100% CD



2. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/8

inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Provide boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches for crickets, and on

Tower roof.

3. Minimum Starting Insulation Assembly Thickness: 4.5 inches.

4. Board Size: 48 inch x 48 inch maximum.

5. Maximum Board Thickness: 2-1/2 inches.

2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use

and compatibility with membrane roofing, and included in manufacturer’s warranty.

B. Cover Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, fiber-reinforced, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 3/8

inch thick.

1. Fire Performance: UL Class A, ASTM E 84 Flame Spread 5.

2. Compressive Strength: 1800 psi minimum.

3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide United States

Gypsum Co. Securock Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board.

C. Fiber Cant and Tapered Edge Strip: Wood fiberboard, manufactured to uniform density using

cellulosic wood fibers with additives to improve moisture resistance, in size and thickness

indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

Continental Materials, Inc.

D. Insulation and Cover Board Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer’s recommended adhesive

formulated to attach roof insulation and coverboard to substrate, or to another insulation layer as

follows:

1. Bead-applied, low-rise, single component solvent-free urethane adhesive.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast Para-

Stik Insulation Adhesive.

2.8 OVERBURDEN COMPONENTS

A. Stone Ballast: Smooth river bottom washed stone, light tan color mix matching predominant

stone color of adjoining roof to south, nominal 1-1/2 inch, Size No. 4 per ASTM D 448.

B. Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square edged, factory cast for

use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and

maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as

follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hanover

Prest Paver.

2. Size: 24 by 24 inches, 2 inches thick. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of

plus or minus 1/16 inch in length, height, and thickness.

3. Weight: 25 lb/sf.

4. Compressive Strength: 8500 psi, minimum; ASTM C 140.





100% CD



5. Colors and Textures: Tudor #13 Finish “Natural” Color.

6. Paver Supports: Paver manufacturer's standard EPDM rubber, high-density polyethylene,

or polyurethane paver support assembly, including adjustable or stackable pedestals,

shims, and spacer tabs for joint spacing of 1/8 inch.

C. Drainage Mat: Dimpled, perforated polypropylene core bonded between two filter fabrics.


Paradrain Extensive Drainage Mat.

2. Thickness: 7/16 inch.

3. Compressive Strength: 15000 psf minimum when evaluated in accordance with ASTM D

1621.

4. Flow Rate: 8 gpm horizontal core when evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 4491.

D. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type VI, 1.8 lb/cu. ft., with edge

drainage channels; installed above roofing membrane.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow

Chemical Co. Styrofoam RoofMate.

2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.

3. Board Size: 2 foot x 8 foot.

4. Compressive Strength: 40 psi minimum when evaluated in accordance with ASTM D

1621.

E. Fabric Mat: Nonwoven chemical-resistant geotextile composed of a network of polypropylene

fibers.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Paradrain 40

Filter Fabric.

2. Weight: 3.8 oz/sy when evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 5261.

3. Flow Rate: 145 gal/min/sf when evaluated in accordance with ASTM D 4491.

F. Vegetation: As specified in Section 077273 “Vegetated Roof Systems.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that cants, blocking, curbs, short framed walls, and nailers are securely anchored

to roof deck at penetrations and terminations, and where indicated on drawings.

3. Verify temporary roofing/base sheet is thoroughly adhered to the substrate, and

undamaged.




100% CD



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Review Section 070150.19 “Preparation for Reroofing” for removal of existing roof system and

installation of base sheet as temporary roof.

B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving roofing to prevent spillage from affecting other

construction.

D. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking

place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS

A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive roofing, including joints and cracks, roof drains, and

penetrations, according roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 UNIT PRICE DECK INSPECTION

A. In each of seven distinct roof sections – three Main Roof and two Extension Roof sections

separated by new short framed walls, the Mechanical Penthouse, and the Stair Bulkhead – plug

drain and flood section with water approximately one inch deep. Owner’s Representative will

inspect flooded roof and direct at which perimeters Unit Price Additional Slope Assembly shall

be installed. Provide Owner’s Representative minimum 72 hours notice of flood test.

3.5 MASONRY PREPARATION

A. Apply PMMA resin paste to brick joints and to cracks, recesses, and similar irregularities in

brick and concrete block base flashing substrates. Scarify masonry substrates to which base

flashing shall be installed to Concrete Surface Profile (CSP) 2 (min.) to 4 (max.), as designated

by the International Concrete Repair Institute.

3.6 TAPERED POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION AND COVER BOARD

INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and cover board are not exposed

to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing

roof insulation.

C. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does

not restrict flow of water.



100% CD



D. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints

staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps between boards

exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation full depth.

1. Offset board joints minimum 12 inches between rows, and minimum 12 inches from

joints in underlying layers.

2. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

E. Install insulation boards and cover boards in beads of adhesive in accordance with

manufacturer's dispensing requirements. Space beads maximum 12 inches on center in Field of

roof, 6 inches on center in Perimeter Zones, and 4 inches on center in Corner Zones. In roof

sections where overburden is required, space beads maximum 12 inches on center throughout.

Apply beads in patterns meeting manufacturer's published requirements. Field, Perimeter and

Corner Zones shall be determined in accordance with current FM Global Property Loss

Prevention Data Sheet l-28

F. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints

staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 12 inches in each

direction. Loosely butt cover boards together.

G. Review Section 075900 “Leak Detection System” for information on leak detection conductive

mesh, to be installed between tapered insulation and cover board.

3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashing according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install cants and tapered

edge strips as indicated, at junctures of horizontal and vertical substrates. Set in adhesive.

Neatly cut and remove portions of base sheet which extend past top of cants and tapered edges.

Prepare and prime newly-exposed portions of vertical substrate in accordance with

requirements. Protect newly-installed roofing materials from contamination and damage during

preparation and priming operations. Damaged materials, and materials which cannot be brought

into condition required by manufacturer for installation of subsequent roofing components, shall

be removed and replaced.

B. Prime substrate with asphalt primer at rates specified by manufacturer over prepared substrates.

C. Trowel-apply resin paste over primed surfaces where substrate irregularities exist. Wipe

surface of catalyzed paste with manufacturer-approved cleaner or solvent prior to application of

flashing membrane.

D. Pre-cut fleece to ensure a proper fit at transitions and corners prior to membrane application.

E. Apply base coat of catalyzed flashing resin with roller, at minimum rate specified by

manufacturer. Fully embed fleece into wet, catalyzed resin to remove trapped air. Lap fleece

layers minimum 2 inch, and apply an additional coat of flashing resin between layers of

overlapping fleece. Apply top coat of catalyzed flashing resin with roller, ensuring that resin

extends beyond the fleece a maximum of 0.25 inch.

F. Extend flashing sheet up walls and parapets as indicated on drawings.



100% CD



G. At wood substrates to which base flashings shall be installed, apply specified primer and install

self-adhesive roll ply over entire primed wood surface, prior to installing the PMMA

membrane.

3.8 ROOFING MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Install roofing membrane according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Where required, apply primer over prepared substrates at manufacturer's recommended rate.

C. Start application with manufacturer's authorized representative present.

D. Reinforced Membrane: Apply base coat of catalyzed resin with roller, at minimum rate

specified by manufacturer. Fully embed fleece into wet, catalyzed resin to remove trapped air.

Lap fleece layers minimum 2 inch, and apply an additional coat of resin between layers of

overlapping fleece. Apply top coat of catalyzed resin with roller.

E. Allow membrane to cure prior to exposure to foot traffic.

F. Install drainage mat.

3.9 EXTRUDED-POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Loosely lay board insulation units over drainage mat, with long joints of insulation in

continuous straight lines and with end joints staggered between rows. Abut edges and ends

between units.

B. Cut and fit boards to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations.

3.10 BALLAST INSTALLATION

A. To roofed area, apply stone ballast uniformly over geotextile fabric to thickness indicated on

drawings, carefully spreading stone to not damage roofing membrane and base flashings. Apply

ballast as drainage mat, insulation, and fabric are installed, leaving overburden components

ballasted at end of workday.

B. Install stone at rate of l0 psf in Field and 12 psf in Perimeter and Corner Zones.

3.11 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

A. Install vegetated roof system in accordance with Section 077273 “Vegetated Roof Systems.”

3.12 ROOF-PAVER INSTALLATION

A. Install roof pavers on pedestals set according to pedestal manufacturer's written instructions.



100% CD




A. Perform roof leak testing in accordance with Section 075900 “Leak Detection System.”

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect

roofing installation on completion.

1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

3.14 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When

remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and

damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair

substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration

at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

3.15 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein

called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the

following project:

1. Owner: Fashion Institute of Technology

2. Address: 340 8th Avenue, New York, NY 10001

3. Building Name/Type: Fred P. Pomerantz Art and Design Center

4. Address: 340 8th Avenue, New York, NY 10001

5. Area of Work: As indicated on drawings.

6. Acceptance Date: _________________.

7. Warranty Period: Five (5) years.

8. Expiration Date: __________________.

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a

subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and

workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein

set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be

made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and

defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:



100% CD



1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the

building, and to building contents, caused by:

a. lightning;

b. fire;

c. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive

deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;

d. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and

e. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance

personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by

Owner.

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and

void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense

thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.

3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not

liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or

faults or defects of work.

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than

Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with

penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this

Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent

said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer

to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing

Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing

reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work,

thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but

was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded

basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall

become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects

work covered by this Warranty.

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,

defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to

inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work

and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources

lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall

not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work

according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract

was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of

___________________, ________________.

1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________.

2. Name: ______________________________________.

3. Title: _______________________________________.



100% CD






100% CD

WRL #15073.00 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM


SECTION 075900 – LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Leak detection system.


1. Section 075556 “Fluid-Applied Reinforced Membrane Roofing” for roof membrane,

insulation, cover board, and overburden components.

2. Section 077273 “Vegetated Roof Systems” for vegetated roof system and accessories.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual

components and profiles.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Manufacturer-produced scaled layout drawings and details of all conditions and materials

for a complete layout on site, including but not limited to details for penetrations and wall

conditions, sensor layouts, boundary cable configuration, and hub and communicator

locations.


A. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates:

1. List methods and equipment used to perform accurate field layout of all components.

2. Submit certified statement from manufacturer and cosigned by the installer that all

surfaces have been inspected and found satisfactory for installation of the leak detection

system, and are not in conflict with warranty requirements.

3. Submit certificates signed by the manufacture that the installer of the leak detection

system has been properly trained in field installation of the system, including



100% CD



maintenance of logs and as-built drawings, and that the installation complies with the

specifications and manufacturer’s requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports and manufacturer’s final inspection report.

D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer’s special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by leak

detection system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's special warranty.

1. Identify individual within qualified firm who will be responsible for measurement,

installation and documentation of the installed leak detection system. Maintain this

individual throughout the course of the Work.


A. Store leak detection system components in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient

temperatures maintained within the range recommended by manufacturer.



conditions permit installation of leak detection system according to manufacturer’s written

instructions and warranty requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of leak detection system

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes all leak detection system components.

2. Special warranty also includes all labor and material required for overburden removal and

reinstallation required for the repair and replacement of leak detection system

components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gaussan

Technologies DST Leak Monitoring and Location System.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of leak detection system from same manufacturer.



100% CD



2.2 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Conductive Mesh: Stainless steel; installed within roofing system.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gaussan

Con-Duct.

B. Sensors: Prefabricated or field-fabricated, individually or in cable strips; environmentally stable,

held in place with non-invasive means acceptable to roofing membrane manufacturer. Integral

lead cables run from sensors to hubs.


MGLE Sensors.

C. Test Sensors: Permanently installed, to test accuracy of leak detection system at startup.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gaussan E-

Leaks.

D. Boundary Cable: Stainless steel unless otherwise approved by manufacturer; permanently

installed in loops to circumscribe each discrete testing cell or area.


Boundary or Attractor Cable.

2. Additionally install boundary cable in screens around conductive elements such as roof

drains or other items which could interfere with ability of leak detection system to

identify and locate leakage.

E. Hub: Junction point for sensor cables; located at an accessible location within building, or near

the edge of the roofing system on the exterior of the building.


M2P Hub.

F. Communicator: Located on or near the monitored site, within building; programmed to poll

hubs and evaluate response from modules to determine trends that indicate leakage or damage

to membrane.


JACE Communicator.

2. Provide RS-485 port for remote and manual data access, connected to the internet.

3. Provide RS-485 cabling to connect each hub to communicator.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide electrical components as required for a complete leak detection system installation.

Components include but are not limited to fuse panels, junction boxes, wire ties, circuit

breakers, and GFCI outlets.



100% CD



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with installation requirements for

roughness, contaminants, unsound substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate all activity associated with leak detection system installation and testing with

roofing installer. Ensure that leak detection system work does not impede installation of roof

membrane and related components.

B. Review roofing materials and appurtenances which are incompatible with the leak detection

system. Identify and document any conductive overburden elements, and employ measures to

mitigate grounding conditions caused by these elements.

C. Coordinate leak detection system installation to protect system from inadvertent damage from

foot or vehicular traffic.

D. Identify and coordinate required entry points of leak detection system cabling into building.

E. Identify locations for installation of hubs and communicators within building. Provide a 110

volt, 15 amp circuit for each communicator and for all hubs combined. Circuits do not need to

be dedicated.

3.3 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install leak detection system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations.

B. Install conductive mesh above polyisocyanurate insulation and below cover board, in

accordance with approved shop drawings. Review Section 075556 “Fluid-Applied Reinforced

Membrane Roofing” for installation of roof components.

C. Install conductive mesh at base flashing locations as indicated on drawings.

D. Place custom cable assemblies, consisting of chains of sensor modules or individual sensors,

directly on top of the roofing membrane. Install sensor assembly in a preplanned layout, and

hard wire back to distribution hubs.

E. Install boundary cables where indicated on approved shop drawings, and hard wire back to

distribution hubs.



100% CD



F. Locate hubs in vicinity where leads from sensors, boundary cables and test sensors either exit

the overburden or enter the building. Connect hubs to communicator via RS-485 cables.

G. Install protection and drainage layers over sensors and roof membrane prior to allowing foot or

vehicle traffic on leak detection system.

H. During installation, do not allow contaminants to contact leak detection system components.

Report any such contact to Architect, and repair or replace system components per

manufacturer’s instruction.


A. Daily Log: Maintain daily log containing all delivery records, all testing records, and all

placement records and notes. Provide daily log to Owner at completion of work.

B. Preliminary Leak Testing: Perform preliminary leak testing after installation of roofing

membrane, but prior to installation of leak detection sensors.

1. Requirements:

a. Water supply and pressure adequate for leak testing, and personnel to deploy water

where needed.

b. 110/220 volt power accessible at roof level.

c. Repair roofing membrane at time of testing, so area may be immediately retested.

2. Procedure:

a. Perform preliminary leak testing of all roof areas using high-voltage and low-

voltage vector mapping leak detection system as approved by leak detection

system manufacturer.

b. Identify roof leaks, as well as electrical anomalies within roofing system which are

not leaks.

c. Provide summary report to include locations of potential problems, photos of the

existing roof, and description of testing conditions.

d. Repair leaks and immediately retest as required until all leaks have been corrected.

e. Provide written certification that roofing membrane is leak-free according to

results of preliminary leak testing.

C. Final Leak Testing: Perform final leak testing after all work at roof is complete, including but

not limited to installation of roof membrane, leak detection system, overburden components,

vegetated roof system, and roof specialties.

1. Intent of final leak testing is to ensure roof membrane was not damaged subsequent to

preliminary leak testing.

2. Final leak testing shall include all items noted in Preliminary Leak Testing above. In

addition, final leak testing shall include removal and reinstallation of overburden

components as required for repair of identified roof leaks.

D. Final Leak Detection System Testing: Perform when discrete, agreed-upon portion of the

membrane installation has been completed.

1. Perform final testing only after all of the following items are complete:

a. Preliminary leak testing.

b. Leads from sensors have been checked for continuity and connected to hubs.



100% CD



c. Hubs are able to be powered up and connected to communicator with RS-485

cable.

d. Communicator is powered up and connected to the internet.

e. Boundary or attractor cables are deployed and secured.

f. Membrane is damp, so top surface can conduct electrical signal generated by

boundary cable.

2. Procedure:

a. Testing unit to poll sensors multiple times, and record received signal.

b. Develop and install map of project during calibration of the communicator.

c. An internet connection is required to start the system, calibrate it and run it for a

period of time, minimum 12 months. System will sense for leaks during this time.

d. Repair any reported anomalies using high-voltage and low-voltage vector mapping

leak detection system.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.

2. Formed roof sheet metal fabrications.

3. Formed skylight curb flashing.



2. Section 077100 “Roof Specialties” for gravel stop and coping assemblies produced by

roofing manufacturer.

3. Section 077129 “Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints” for manufactured expansion

joints.

4. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants at roof.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of

penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,

joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs,

and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.



100% CD




A. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.

3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project.

4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.

7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing

direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.

8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.

9. Include details of edge conditions.

10. Include details of special conditions.

11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-

applied finishes.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and

in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous

Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed

accessories.

3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in

maintenance manuals.



100% CD




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing

and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful

in-service performance.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of each new sheet metal flashing assembly, comprising two full lengths of

each sheet metal component and joint treatment, including supporting construction cleats,

seams, attachments and accessories.



in writing.




A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might

cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials

away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to

sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and

trim installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal

flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within

specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



100% CD



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed

sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing

Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and

profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook" and

current edition of Revere Copper Products “Copper and Common Sense.” Conform to

dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying

strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or CDA “H00 for Flashing”; 99

percent pure copper.

1. Nonpatinated Exposed Finish: Mill.

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3105-H14 alloy and temper; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with

coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.





100% CD




A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as

recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by

manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or

factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers

under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal

being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or passivated Series 300 stainless

steel.

3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead, or lead-free

alternative of similar or greater strength.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape

with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2

inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use

classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

Provide in accordance with Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted

joints.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and

recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,

metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and

trim in shop to greatest extent possible.



100% CD



1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners

on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to

a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within

1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to

tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled

with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide

for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or

from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal

standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not

less than thickness of metal being secured.

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving copper seams with flat-lock seams, or with 2-inch overlap and

rivets spaced at 2- to 3-inches. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

I. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal

with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

J. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.5 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and

other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections. Furnish flat-stock

gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of

size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than 0.060 inch.

Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter

accessories from same metal as gutters.



100% CD



1. Gutter Profile: As indicated on drawings according to cited sheet metal standard.

2. Expansion Joints: Lap type.

3. Gutters: Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular corrugated downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete

with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers. Shop fabricate elbows.

1. Hanger Style: Aluminum 0.032 inch thick, 1 inch wide, color to match downspout;

hanger spacing maximum 10 feet on center.

2. Fabricate downspouts from the following materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.

2.6 ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cap Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials unless otherwise indicated, at locations

indicated on drawings:

1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft.

2. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.

B. Drip Edge: Fabricate from the following materials:


C. Flashing Shield: Fabricate from the following materials:


D. Fascia, Cleats, Fascia Underplates: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Formed Skylight Curb Flashing, Flue Stack Base and Storm Collar: Fabricate from the

following materials:

1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft..

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.



100% CD





A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective

coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal

flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat

seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating

sheet metal.

3. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of

buckling and tool marks.

4. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-

treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as

recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or

wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace

Ultra Self-Adhered High Temperature Underlayment.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or

intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled

with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener

manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to

minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight

installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint

members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.

When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint

members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for



100% CD



installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at

temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants."

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges

of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned

surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet.

2. Do not use torches without irons, or electric irons, for soldering.

3. Heat surfaces to receive solder by applying heated iron, and flow solder into joint. Fill

joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper.

H. Rivets: Rivet joints in aluminum where necessary for strength.

3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system

according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of

roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal

watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.

2. Anchor back edge of gutter to continuous aluminum drip edge.

3. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 12 inches apart to roof deck,

unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.

1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate

hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 8 to 10 feet o.c.

2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.

3. Spill downspout onto roof paver.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and

cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line,

levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and

weather resistant.

B. Cap Flashing: Coordinate installation of cap flashing with installation of base flashing. Extend

cap flashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap cap flashing joints and secure in waterproof



100% CD



manner by means indicated on drawings and as specified. Form 2-inch high, full depth end

dams at cap flashing ends. Rivet and solder joints.

C. Form seams in fascias with 5-inch underplates conforming to fascia profile. Apply sealant in

fascia/underplate lap.

D. Install cleats with 1/2 inch between ends.

E. Overlap drip edge lengths 4 inches, with sealant within lap.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Skylight Curb Flashing: Coordinate installation of flashing with installation of roofing and

equipment. Overlap, rivet, and solder all joints.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance

of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch

offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances

specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean

finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain

sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 ROOF SPECIALTIES


SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copings.

2. Roof-edge specialties.

3. Prefabricated aluminum vent and curb/base transition.



2. Section 075556 “Fluid-Applied Reinforced Membrane Roofing” for warranty

requirements.

3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom- and site-fabricated sheet

metal flashing and trim.


joint cover assemblies.

5. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and

adjacent materials.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, roofing-system testing and

inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing-system manufacturer's

representative, Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces

with or affects roof specialties, including installers of roofing materials and accessories.

2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and

attachment to structural members.

3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will

affect roof specialties.







100% CD



B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to

other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

2. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including

direction of expansion and contraction.

3. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other

attachments.

4. Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.

5. Include details of special conditions.

C. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied

color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Include Samples of each type of roof specialty to verify finish and color selection, in

manufacturer's standard sizes.

2. Include copings made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components in specified material,

and including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of roof specialty.

C. Product Test Reports: For copings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting requirements

that are FM Approvals listed for specified class and SPRI ES-1 tested to specified design

pressure.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain roof specialties approved by manufacturer providing roofing-system

warranty specified in Section 075556 “Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing”.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.



100% CD



1. Build mockup of each of three different coping assemblies, and of penthouse and

bulkhead gravel stop assemblies as shown on Drawings.



in writing.




A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,

or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high

humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field

measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and other roofing related

construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions in Section

Section 075556 "Fluid-Applied Reinforced Membrane Roofing."

B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof

specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified

warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



100% CD



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally

induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective

manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge specialties that are listed

in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify

materials with FM Approvals' markings.

C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge specialties tested

according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,

failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that

resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on

surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths not

exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice

plates with finish matching coping caps.


Paraguard Coping.

2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Coping Caps: Aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

b. Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, to include

standard and premium colors and finishes.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method:

a. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, 16-ga. galvanized-steel sheet, 12

inches wide, with integral cleats.







100% CD



2.3 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM VENT AND CURB/BASE TRANSITION

A. Prefabricated Aluminum Vent and Curb/Base Transition: Single cone, gravity type, no moving

parts, mill finish aluminum, sized to fit on field constructed wood curb, furnished with #8

aluminum insect screen, l/2 inch aluminum bird screen, and factory fabricated curb mounting

base, as manufactured by Empire Ventilator Equipment Co., Inc., or approved equal.

2.4 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES

A. Gravel Stops: Manufactured metal gravel stop in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with a

horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia terminating in a drip edge, and concealed splice plates

of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide matching corner units.


Proform Gravel Stop.

2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Gravel Stops: Aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

b. Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, to include

standard and premium colors and finishes.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with

temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type

of use and finish indicated, finished as follows:

2.6 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-

resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt

adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by

underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F.

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; passes after testing at minus 20

deg F.


A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet

performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:







100% CD



1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color

of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use

classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application. Provide in

accordance with Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”

C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations

in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Coil-Coated Aluminum Sheet Finishes:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with

coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

b. Concealed Surface Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard acrylic

or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and

securely anchored.



100% CD




3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with

temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in

shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches. Roll laps with roller.

Cover underlayment within 14 days.

1. Apply continuously under copings.

2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties with

requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof

specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use

fasteners, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous

items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning

and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.

3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.

4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.

5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from

contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of

corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint

members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for

installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by

fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal concealed joints as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in

joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.



100% CD



3.4 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with

concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet

performance requirements.

1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap onto cleated anchor plates

anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance

requirements.

3.5 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed

fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to

meet performance requirements.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On

completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal

filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition

during construction.

C. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS


SECTION 077129 - MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flanged bellows-type roof expansion joints.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wooden curbs or cants for mounting roof

expansion joints.

2. Section 075556 “Fluid-Applied Reinforced Membrane Roofing” for warranty

requirements.

3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated sheet

metal expansion-joint systems, flashing, and other sheet metal items.





B. Shop Drawings: For roof expansion joints.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include details of splices, intersections, transitions, fittings, method of field assembly,

and location and size of each field splice.

3. Provide isometric drawings of intersections, terminations, changes in joint direction or

planes, and transition to other expansion joint systems depicting how components

interconnect with each other and adjacent construction to allow movement and achieve

waterproof continuity.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 6 inches in size.



100% CD





B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer of roofing membrane.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Roofing-System Warranty: Manufactured roof expansion joints are included in warranty

provisions in Section 075556 “Fluid-Applied Reinforced Membrane Roofing.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,

failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.


2.2 FLANGED BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Flanged Bellows-Type Roof Expansion Joint: Factory-fabricated, continuous, waterproof, joint

cover consisting of exposed membrane bellows laminated to flexible, closed-cell support foam,

and secured along each edge to 3- to 4-inch- wide metal flange.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johns

Manville Expand-O-Flash Expansion Joint Cover.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain flanged bellows-type roof expansion joints approved by

roofing manufacturer and that are part of roofing membrane warranty.

3. Joint Movement Capability: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Bellows: EPDM flexible membrane, nominal 60 mils thick.

5. Flanges: Aluminum, 0.032 inch thick.

6. Configuration: Flat to fit cants, angle formed to fit curbs, and as indicated on Drawings.

7. Corner, Intersection, and Transition Units: Provide factory-fabricated units for corner and

joint intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions including those to other building

expansion joints.

8. Accessories: Provide splicing units, adhesives, and other components as recommended by

roof-expansion-joint manufacturer for complete installation.

B. Materials:





100% CD



1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, mill finish, with temper to suit forming operations and

performance required.

a. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be

placed in contact with cementitious or preservative-treated wood materials.

2. EPDM Membrane: ASTM D 4637/D 4637M, type standard with manufacturer for

application.


A. Adhesives: As recommended by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to

withstand design loads.

1. Exposed Fasteners: 300-series stainless steel screws and washers with neoprene inserts.

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joint openings, substrates, and expansion-control joint systems that interface with roof

expansion joints, for suitable conditions where roof expansion joints will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof

expansion joints.

1. Anchor roof expansion joints securely in place, with provisions for required movement.

Use fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and miscellaneous items as required to

complete roof expansion joints.

2. Install roof expansion joints true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in

alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

3. Provide for linear thermal expansion of roof expansion joint materials.

4. Provide uniform profile of roof expansion joint throughout its length; do not stretch or

squeeze membranes.

5. Provide uniform, neat seams.

6. Install roof expansion joints to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

B. Directional Changes: Install factory-fabricated units at directional changes to provide

continuous, uninterrupted, and watertight joints.





100% CD



C. Splices: Splice roof expansion joints to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and waterproof

joints.

1. Install waterproof splices and prefabricated end dams to prevent leakage of secondary-

seal membrane.

D. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from






100% CD

WRL #15073.00 ROOF ACCESSORIES


SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Dropout-type heat and smoke vents.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, and safety railings.

2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal

flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet

metal trim and accessories.

3. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops,

gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing.


joint covers.

5. Section 086200 "Unit Skylights" for glazed skylights with curb frame.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing

and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and

noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be

supported.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.



B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.



100% CD



1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate

dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-

assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on

Samples of size to adequately show color.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-

mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.

3. Required clearances.

B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally

induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective

manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

2.2 HEAT AND SMOKE VENTS

A. Dropout-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Manufacturer's standard, gravity operated and automatic;

with double-walled insulated curbs and frame, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed

corner joints, integral condensation gutter, cap flashing, and heat-sensitive dome glazing that

will deform and drop out of vent opening according to heat and smoke vent standard indicated.


following:

a. APC Dayliter; C/S Group.

b. Pate Company (The)

2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 30-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.








100% CD



a. Dome Glazing: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal

uplift load.

4. Heat and Smoke Vent Standard: Provide units that have been tested and listed to comply

with UL 793 and are FM Approved.

5. Curb and Framing Material: Aluminum sheet.

a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for vent size indicated.

b. Finish: Clear anodic.

6. Construction:

a. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard.

b. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter.

c. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal

curb.

d. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless

otherwise indicated.

7. Dome Glazing: Double acrylic glazing of thickness capable of resisting indicated loads.

a. Single-Dome Color: Colorless, transparent.

b. Outer Double-Dome Color: Colorless, transparent.

8. Fall Protection Safety Structure: Manufacturer's standard meeting impact load

requirements of 29 CFR 1910.23 and authorities having jurisdiction, and manually

openable from exterior without special tools.

9. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion resistant; with hinges, hold-open devices,

and independent manual-release devices for inside and outside operation of lids.

2.3 METAL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper

to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Mill Finish: As manufactured.

2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white

or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film

thickness of 0.2 mil.

3. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry

film thickness of 0.5 mil.

B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for

type of use, finished to match assembly where used; otherwise mill finished.



100% CD




A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, manufacturer's standard,

Type UVA (formulated with UV absorber), Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

C. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, thickness as indicated.

D. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity

of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated.

E. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness and thermal resistivity as

indicated.

F. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for

aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or

chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

H. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or

silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

I. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as recommended

by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class,

and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

J. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.

K. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required for

application.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



100% CD



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs

in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.

3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete

installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.

4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or

loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from



1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating

where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood

substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended

slip sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of

roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Heat and Smoke Vent Installation:

1. Install heat and smoke vent so top perimeter surfaces are level.

2. Install and test heat and smoke vents and their components for proper operation

according to NFPA 204.

D. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.



100% CD



3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS


SECTION 077273 - VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Tray-type vegetated roof assemblies.


1. Section 075556 "Fluid-Applied Reinforced Membrane Roofing" for roofing membrane,

roof thermal insulation, aggregate or roof-paver ballast, and roofing system warranty.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

B. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: Vegetation in general.

C. Growing Medium: Manufactured, lightweight soil mixture that promotes good growing

conditions for specific varieties of plants.




A. Product Data: For each vegetated roof assembly.



2. Include material descriptions for each growing medium.

B. Shop Drawings: For each vegetated roof assembly.

1. Include plans, sections, slopes, and drain locations.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, and loads.



100% CD



3. Detail field assembly of components, depth of growing media, and attachments to other

work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following components of vegetated roof assembly:

1. Vegetated Module: Two full-size samples, including module connectors.

2. Growing Media: 1-pint volume of each growing medium, in sealed plastic bags labeled

with content and source. Each Sample shall be typical of the lots of growing media to be

furnished. Provide an accurate representation of texture and composition.

3. Root Barrier: 12 by 12 inches.

4. Edging: Manufacturer's standard size to verify configuration and color selected.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product.

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.

2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory, according to methods established

by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

C. Product Test Reports: For complete analysis of each growing medium, for tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or by a qualified testing agency.

1. Confirm particle size distribution report by certified soil testing agency to demonstrate

growing medium meets minimum ASTM D 2397 and FLL Guidelines for multi-course

extensive sites.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For vegetated roof assembly and plants, including a recommended

maintenance plan with procedures for inspection and care during a calendar year. Submit before

start of required warranty and maintenance periods.

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From vegetated roof assembly Installer to Owner, in the

form of a standard two-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service

is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for

future renewal options.



100% CD




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified vegetated roof assembly Installer, approved, authorized, or

licensed by vegetated roof system manufacturer, whose work has resulted in successful

establishment of vegetated roofs.

1. Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on

Project site when vegetated roof assembly work is in progress.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing

weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance

with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Handle and store materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid overloading roof

structure or damaging roofing membrane.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit planting to be performed when optimum results may be obtained. Apply

products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions

and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly: Installer agrees to repair or replace

components of vegetated roof assembly that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, ponding water or prolonged wetness of growing

medium caused as a result of failure of the assembly to properly drain.


B. Special Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly Components: Manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of vegetated roof assembly that fail in materials or workmanship, or exhibit

photodegredation within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. Vegetated Roof Module: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Edge Restraint: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Warranty for Plant Growth: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and

accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.



100% CD



1. Foliage Cover: Planted materials shall grow to achieve and maintain at least 80 percent

foliage cover over planting area commencing 24 months after planting, through the

duration of this warranty.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, death and unsatisfactory growth except for defects

resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, neglect by Owner, or incidents that

are beyond Contractor's control.

3. Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion as follows:

a. Ground Covers, Perennials: Two years.

4. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the

succeeding planting season.

b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at

end of warranty period.

c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or

replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

5. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant

material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of vegetated roof system components.

B. Wind Uplift: Provide wind uplift rating for vegetated roof system per Standard Test Method for

Wind Resistance of Modular Vegetated Roof.

1. No failure of system at minimum 110 mph wind speed.

C. Demonstrate compliance and approval per Factory Mutual FM Approval Standard 4477:

Vegetative Roof Systems.

1. Class A flame spread rating per ASTM E 108.

2. Foot traffic resistance per FM Test Method for Determining the Foot Traffic Resistance

of Roof Coverings.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain vegetated roof assembly components and accessories from single

source from single manufacturer.



100% CD



2.3 VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES

A. Tray-Type Vegetated Roof Assembly: Modular assembly consisting of manufacturer's

standard, preplanted trays for field assembly adjacent to and interlocking with each other over

roofing system.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide LiveRoof

Roof System.

2. Tray Depth, Nominal: 3.25 inches, with soil height approximately 1 inch above tray for a

total system thickness of 4.25 inches.

3. Tray Size: 12 by 24 inches.

4. Assembly Weight: Maximum29 lb/sq. ft., including growing medium and plants and

saturated with captured water, but not including weight of roofing system.

5. Plantings: Sedum as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard varieties.

2.4 VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS

A. Module Connectors: Manufacturer’s standard, designed and tested to enhance wind uplift

resistance.

2.5 MANUFACTURED GROWING MEDIA

A. Growing Medium: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's lightweight, manufactured soil

mixture designed for plants indicated on Drawings.

1. General Condition at Time of Planting: Free of aggregates 1/2 inch or larger in any

dimension; free of roots, plants, clods, pockets of sand, paint, building debris, oils,

solvents, roofing materials, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free

of weeds, disease-causing plant pathogens, and other undesirable organisms.

2. Composition: Soil enhanced to German FLL 93 percent inorganic content, by dry weight.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Edge Restraint: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edging with

drainage openings, connected with aluminum sliding connectors.

1. Configuration: L-shaped.

2. Color: Black anodized.

3. Method of Attachment: Where not surrounded by ballast, provide manufacturer's

standard attachment to roof modules.







100% CD



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine each area to receive vegetated roof assembly for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that roof insulation over roofing membrane is in place, secure, and flush along all

seams.

2. Verify that perimeter and other flashings are in place and secure along entire lengths

where they will be covered by vegetated roof assembly.

B. Inspect growing medium.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid, such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,

paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in growing

medium within a planting area.

2. If growing medium is contaminated by foreign or deleterious material or liquid, remove

growing medium and contamination and replace with new growing medium.


A. Install vegetated roof assembly according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 VEGETATED ROOF MODULE INSTALLATION

A. Begin installation of vegetated roof modules when weather is above 35 degrees F, there is no

ice on the roof, and engineered soil is unfrozen.

B. Install modules in straight rows, tight against each other, with edges overlapping and arranged

in proper directional orientation. Install module connectors.

C. Water modules immediately after installation.

3.4 EDGE RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

A. Install edge restraint where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests.

B. Perform the following tests:



100% CD



1. Electronic Leak-Detection Testing: Perform in accordance with Section 075900 “Leak

Detection System.”

a. Testing agency shall test each deck area for leaks using an electronic leak-

detection method that locates discontinuities in the roofing membrane.

b. Testing agency shall perform tests on abutting or overlapping smaller areas as

necessary to cover entire test area.

c. Testing agency shall provide survey report indicating locations of discontinuities if

any.

2. Proceed with installation of vegetated roof assembly only after unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage roofing-membrane manufacturer's authorized service

representative to provide inspection of vegetated roof assembly installation and prepare

inspection reports.

D. Correct deficiencies in work that do not comply with requirements.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect vegetated roof assemblies from damage, including growing-medium contamination, due

to operations of other contractors and trades. Repair or replace damaged vegetated roof

assemblies.

3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of vegetated roof assembly

Installer. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings

are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than the specified maintenance

period.

1. Assembly and Plant Maintenance: During maintenance period, maintain plantings by

pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers,

adjusting and repairing devices, resetting plants to proper elevations or vertical position,

and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray

or treat as required to keep plantings free of insects and disease.

a. Replace growing medium that becomes displaced or eroded because of settling or

other processes.

b. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and growing

medium free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management

practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical

controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

c. Use only products and methods acceptable to roofing-membrane manufacturer.



100% CD



2. Maintenance Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING


SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.





B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of

firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified

testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping

system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration

firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment

or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having

jurisdiction prior to submittal.



B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.



100% CD




A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been

installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to

comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using

natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to


2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.

Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified

testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."

3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."



100% CD



2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other

gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration

firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming

openings, and with penetrating items if any.


following:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products.

b. Hilti, Inc.

c. Specified Technologies, Inc.

d. Tremco, Inc.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water

leakage when tested according to UL 1479.

D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less

than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by

penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting

agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.

2. Substrate primers.

3. Collars.

4. Steel sleeves.












100% CD



2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one

end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during

exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents

or inorganic fibers.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil

on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,

fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a

nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant

additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect

pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application,

comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate

proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer

speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce

products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.



100% CD



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings

immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following

requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials

that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable

of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose

particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's

recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage

and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths

required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible

forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of

firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and

penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.



100% CD



3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with

the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering

not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of

wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or

plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of

penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove

penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels

with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed.

Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to

ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed

because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with

requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that

penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial



100% CD



Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out

and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials

to produce systems complying with specified requirements.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 JOINT SEALANTS


SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urethane joint sealants.

2. Polyether joint sealants.

3. Latex joint sealants.




A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples

with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material

matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and




100% CD



C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint

sealant and substrate material to be tested:

1. Joint-sealant location and designation.

2. Manufacturer and product name.

3. Type of substrate material.

4. Proposed test.

5. Number of samples required.

D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation are needed for adhesion.

E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation

methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in

"Preconstruction Testing" Article.

F. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the

testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated

to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods

specified in this Section.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated

below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific

joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint

sealants to joint substrates.

2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in

contact with glazing and gasket materials.



100% CD



3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact

with substrates.

4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material,

including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials.

5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.

7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on

previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining

of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to

Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative

present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail

Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.

Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data

on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail

adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing

adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with

requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to

joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.



100% CD



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or

replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements

specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from

the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and

minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

2.3 POLYETHER JOINT SEALANTS

A. Polyether, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,

Class 25, Use NT.







100% CD



1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ChemLink

NovaLink Elastomeric Joint Sealant.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,

primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer

based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),

and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum

sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.










100% CD



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing

optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint

sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-

sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling

without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.



100% CD



3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in

ASTM C 1193.

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on

Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and

joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each

floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;

extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure

for opposite side.



100% CD



3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of

product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion

complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints

were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant

configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures

used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new

sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of

products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without

deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage

or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants

immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints in masonry and concrete.

b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.



100% CD



2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints at metal flashing and counterflashing.


2. Joint Sealant: Polyether, S, NS, 25, NT.


C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Perimeter joints between interior ceiling surfaces and frames of skylights and

skylight shades.


2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.





100% CD

WRL #15073.00 UNIT SKYLIGHTS


SECTION 086200 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Unit skylights mounted on site-erected curbs.


1. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glass in unit skylights.




A. Product Data: For each type of unit skylight.


and profiles, and finishes for unit skylights.

B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and

other adjoining work.

C. Aluminum Finish Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section

of each unit skylight in manufacturer's standard size.

D. Glazing Samples: In accordance with Section 088000 “Glazing”.

E. Product Schedule: For unit skylights. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.



100% CD



B. Product Test Reports: For each type and size of unit skylight, for tests performed within the last

four years by a qualified testing agency. Test results based on testing of smaller unit skylights

than specified will not be accepted.


D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For unit skylights to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or

exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion

in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of

units required for this Project.

1.8 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of each type of unit skylight, including specified glazing types.



in writing.



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Uncontrolled water leakage.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

c. Deterioration of insulating-glass hermetic seal.

d. Abnormal aging or deterioration of plastic glazing.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion unless noted below.



100% CD



a. Warranty period of two years for abnormal aging or deterioration of plastic

glazing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wasco Products

Skylight types as follows, at locations indicated on drawings:

1. Insulating Glass Glazing Skylight: Wasco SkyMax.

2. Plastic Glazing Skylight: Wasco EcoSky E3CA.


A. Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and

minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless

more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Performance Class and Grade: Class SKG-PG 80.

2. Certification: AAMA-, WDMA-, or CSA-certified unit skylights with label attached to

each.

2.3 UNIT SKYLIGHTS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum

glazing retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance

requirements indicated.

B. Unit Shape and Size: As indicated.

C. Plastic Glazing: Factory-assembled, impact-modified.

1. Double-Glazing Profile:

a. Exterior Glazing: Thermoformed impact glazing, translucent IR reflecting Acrylite

Satin Sky dome.

b. Interior Glazing: 10mm multi-wall flat cellular polycarbonate panel filled with

Lumira aerogel insulating material.

2. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F or more for plastic sheets in thickness indicated

when tested according to ASTM D 1929.

3. Smoke-Production Characteristics: Smoke-developed index of 450 or less when tested

according to ASTM E 84, and smoke density of 75 or less when tested according to

ASTM D 2843

4. Burning Characteristics: Tested according to ASTM D 635. Class CC1.





100% CD



D. Insulating Glass: Clear, sealed units that comply with Section 088000 "Glazing".

E. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.

F. Retainer Frame: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5, with minimum effective thickness of 0.60

inch.

G. Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging

weeps to collect and drain condensation to the exterior.

H. Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating exterior and interior

metal framing.


A. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other

noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match

material being fastened.

1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide

nonremovable fastener heads.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness

per coat.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer

present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof

insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work

performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.



100% CD



B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for

installing unit skylights.

C. Install unit skylights level, plumb, and true to line, without distortion.

D. Anchor unit skylights securely to supporting substrates.

E. Where aluminum surfaces of unit skylights will contact another metal or corrosive substrates,

such as preservative-treated wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or

provide other approved permanent separation recommended in writing by unit skylight

manufacturer.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but

before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Perform test for total area of each unit skylight.

D. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up

damaged metal coatings and finishes.

B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged

during construction period.

D. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 GLAZING


SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for skylights.


1. Section 086200 “Unit Skylights” for skylight construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and

face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.



100% CD





B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12

inches square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated,

low-E coatings.

B. Product Certificates: For glass.

C. Product Test Reports: For insulating glass, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings:

A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who

are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for

materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 086200 “Unit Skylights” to match glazing

systems required for Project, including glazing methods.




A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or

other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to

avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.



100% CD




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when

glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace

coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated

glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or

to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects

include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass

breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written

instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision

through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to

glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written

instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior

surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each

glass type.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.





100% CD




A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and

impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to

the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to

remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in

construction.

B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with

16 CFR 1201, Category II.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite.

3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped

Glazing."

4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with

certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety

glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with

performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm.



100% CD



E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-

strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is

indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully

tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)

unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,

Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as

indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

D. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2

(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's

"Engineering Standards Manual."

2.5 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to

bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer

manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to

comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a

dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.

2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.







100% CD



2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,

including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,

under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer

based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at

time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

2.8 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer

rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and

complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive

on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for

application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in

installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.





100% CD



E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant

performance.

2.10 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product

manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance

requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on

glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so

that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible

marks in the completed Work.



100% CD



3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or

impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and

glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances

and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant

width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of

tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket

on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is

subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by

gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.



100% CD



3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to

make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and

installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners

and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket

manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-

glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.



100% CD




A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of

dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,

remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for

inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in

writing by glass manufacturer.

3.7 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-1: Low-E-coated, clear insulating laminated glass with ceramic frit.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Guardian

products as specified below.

a. Overall Unit Thickness: 1.223 inch.

2. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass; clear.

a. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.

b. Low-E Coating: SunGuard SN 68 on second surface.

3. Interspace Content: Air, 0.50 inch.

4. Indoor Lite: Laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass.

a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm.

b. Outboard Glass Ply: White frit on third surface; 50 percent stripes.

c. Interlayer: 0.060 inch total thickness.

1) Outboard Layer: 0.030 inch Vanceva 0009 Arctic Snow 2165 PVB.

2) Inboard Layer: 0.030 inch Saflex R Clear PVB.

d. Inboard Glass Ply: Clear.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 INTERIOR PAINTING


SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according

to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,


C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,


E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.



100% CD



1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to

verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects

and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of

each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.



in writing.




A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.



100% CD




A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5

deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Interior

Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its

"MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing

finishes and primers.







100% CD



E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,

and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI

Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture

with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar

hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.



100% CD




A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply

additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Wood Substrates:

1. Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Sherwin Williams Premium Wall and Wood Primer, B28W08111.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, eggshell.

1) Sherwin Williams ProMar Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel B20-2600 Series.

B. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, low odor/VOC.

1) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W02600.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, eggshell.

1) Sherwin Williams ProMar Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel B20-2600 Series.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 SKYLIGHT WINDOW SHADES


SECTION 122486 – SKYLIGHT WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Motorized roller skylight window shades.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)

1. ASHRAE 74: Method of Measuring Solar-Optical Properties of Materials.

B. ASTM International

1. ASTM D3273: Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface

of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

2. ASTM D6329: Standard Guide for Developing Methodology for Evaluating the Ability

of Indoor Materials to Support Microbial Growth Using Static Environmental Chambers.

3. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

4. ASTM E2180: Standard Test Method for Determining the Activity of Incorporated

Antimicrobial Agent(s) In Polymeric or Hydrophobic Materials.

5. ASTM G21: Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi.

C. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

1. ISO 6941: Burning Behaviour of Textile Fabrics, Measurement of Flame Spread

Properties of Vertically Oriented Specimens.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code.

2. NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films.


A. Product Data: For each type of skylight window shade, including manufacturer recommended

installation procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Include skylight window opening dimensions, electrical and control wiring,

method of attachment and structural support.



100% CD



C. Samples: Provide fabric and metal finish samples.

D. Window Shade Schedule: List rooms, field verified skylight window dimensions, quantities,

type of shade, controls, fabric, and color.

E. Certificate of Environmental Compliance: Documentation indicating fabrics meet or exceed

the following field-validated standards set by GREENGUARD Environmental Institute (GEI)

program for products and materials with low chemical and particle emissions for indoor

usage.

1. GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified.

F. Lead Free Certification: RoHS labeled or proof of certification.


A. Refer to Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures”.

B. Maintenance data.


A. Source Limitation: Obtain skylight window shades from single manufacturer as a complete

unit.

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide shade fabric with the fire-test-response

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated

by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver skylight window shades after building is enclosed and construction within spaces

where shades will be installed is substantially complete.

B. Deliver skylight window shades in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers

with identification labels intact.

1. Label containers according to Window Shade Schedule.

C. Inspect skylight window shades for freight damage, concealed or otherwise, upon delivery to

project site. Report damage to freight carrier immediately for replacement of skylight window

shades.

D. Store skylight window shades in resealed manufacturer’s original containers.



100% CD



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Hardware and Shade Fabric Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

skylight window shades that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include but are not limited to mounting hardware, headbox, clutch, fascia and

shade fabric.


B. Manufacturer’s Motor and Controls Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

motorized skylight window shades that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Failures include but are not limited to controls, electronic accessories and motors.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Draper, Inc.; 411 South Pearl Street; Spiceland, IN 47385-0425; Phone 765.987.7999; website

www.draperinc.com

2.2 SKYLIGHT WINDOW SHADES

A. Skylight Window Shades: Electrically operated, roll-up, fabric skylight window shade.

Assembly to include spring roller, side support flanges, take-up reel, motorized operator,

controls, mounting hardware and other components necessary for complete installation.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Skylight

FlexShade as manufactured by Draper, Inc.

B. Method of Installation: Mount skylight window shade inside skylight opening.

C. Rollers:

1. Operator Roller: 2 inch diameter, .080 inch thick, extruded aluminum.

2. Provide with roller idler assembly of injection molded plastic containing a spring-loaded

steel pin for easy installation and removal of roller.

3. Take-up Roller: Electro-galvanized steel roller, of appropriately sized diameter, with

heavy duty springs. Equip with 1/16 inch thick machined aluminum take-up reels to

ensure take-up cable remains in alignment.

4. Fabric Connection: Fabric securely attached to roller at top with LSE double sided tape

and at bottom to weighted dowel.

D. Endcaps: Stamped steel with roller adapter bracket, designed for mounting enclosure and

receiving fabric guides.

http://www.draperinc.com/



100% CD



1. Finish: White baked enamel paint.

E. Extruded Aluminum Shapes: Fabricated from 0.06 inch thick extruded aluminum with white

baked enamel paint finish.

1. Operating and Take-up Enclosures: L-shaped back/top cover and L-shaped front/bottom

sections with grooves to accept light seal elements.

2. Side Support Flanges: Double chamber fabricated from extruded aluminum sections.

One chamber accepts fabric and contains groove for fabric retainer. Other chamber

accepts fabric guide and channel locator. Provide plastic cover buttons for outside

mounts.

3. Slat Bar: U-shaped sections with attachment point for shade fabric and cable idler

bearings.

a. Idler bearings shall provide self-adjusting equalization of the cable tension at each

end of slat bar.

F. Take-up Cable: 3/64” stainless steel, nylon coated, with a minimum breaking strength of 220

lbs.; never visible during operation.

G. Fabric Guides: Plated steel transition for fabric to reduce friction as it rolls into side support

flange.

H. Fabric Support System: Horizontal steel stays installed at regular intervals within fabric

pockets on shade fabric.

I. Support Cables: 3/16 inch diameter vinyl clad stranded steel cable permanently installed

parallel to shade travel direction and attached with brackets and turnbuckles.

J. Operator:

1. Electric Operator: Tubular motor concealed inside shade roller tube.

a. Standard Motor: 110-120V AC, single-phase, 60 HZ, instantly reversible, lifetime

lubricated, and equipped with internal thermal overload protector, electric brake,

and pre-set accessible limit switches.(Compatible with Intelliflex Controls.)

2.3 STANDARD MOTOR CONTROLS

A. Group Control: Standard or 120V, UL listed controls and input devices with automatic

recalibration and simplified wiring, packaged together for seamless installation.

1. Basis-of-Design: Intelliflex Control System as manufactured by Draper, Inc.

2. Controller:

a. Group Control: Four 110-120V, single-motor electronic “isolating relays”

packaged in an 8 by 8-inch enclosure with spring-loaded connection terminals.

1) Basis-of-Design: IntelliFlex GC4

3. Input Device:



100% CD



a. Single Line Voltage Switch: 110-120v, 15 amp, toggle 3-position wall switch, UL

and CSA recognized. Switch shall be single-pole, double-throw, maintained or

momentary action.

2.4 FABRIC

A. Room Darkening Fabrics

1. Basis-of-Design: SheerWeave Series SW7000, as manufactured by Phifer.

a. Fabric Content and Structure: 100 percent polyester with acrylic foam backing.

PVC free.

b. Performance Characteristics:

1) Flame retardant per NFPA 701 (TM#1, small scale), California U.S. Title 19

(small scale), and BS 5867-2 (Type B).

2) Bacteria and Fungi Resistant per ASTM G21.

3) GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified®.

4) GREENGUARD Children & Schools (SM) Certified.

5) Lead free certified per RoHS.

c. Openness Factor: 0 percent in accordance with ASHRAE 74.

d. Thickness: 0.026 inches.

e. Weight: 12.00 oz./sq. yd.

B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

C. Seaming: None.

D. Battens: Provide 1/4-inch wide spring steel inserted into 1-1/8-inch pockets to improve

flatness and operation per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify field dimensions of skylights prior to fabrication of skylight window shades.

B. Coordinate blocking and structural support requirements of skylight window shades to ensure

proper attachment and support.

C. Coordinate requirements and location of power supply, conduit, and wiring required for

motorized skylight window shade motors and controls.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install skylight window shades at locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Comply with skylight window shade manufacturer's written instructions and shop drawings.



100% CD



C. Install roller enclosures and side support flanges with sealant specified in Section 079200

“Joint Sealants” to eliminate light leaks at perimeter of shade system.

D. Position skylight window shade level and in alignment with skylight opening. Secure with

fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

E. Provide support cables at 27 inches minimum taut. Install taut, centered, and parallel to side

support flanges with brackets and turnbuckles.

3.3 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Test skylight window shades to verify that operating mechanism, controls, limit switches,

fabric retainer, and other operating components are functional. Correct deficiencies.

B. During daylight hours, close skylight window shades and turn off interior lights. Verify that

there are no direct light streaks at perimeter or within shade assembly. Correct deficiencies.

C. Demonstrate operation of skylight window shades to Owner's designated representatives.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect skylight window shades after installation from damage during construction

operations. If damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as

required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

©W estlake Reed Leskosky 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Equipment supports.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 220516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and

anchors.

3. Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for

vibration isolation devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance

requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7 .

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.



100% CD



2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain

approval from authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and

installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for

components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers.

2. Metal framing systems.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.



100% CD



4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel .

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel .

C. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel .

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


following :

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

c. Flex-Strut Inc.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel .

7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc .

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456808509&mf=04&src=wd









100% CD




following :

a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

g. PHS Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels,

accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

7. Coating: Zinc .

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

C. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for

roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.

4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.

5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.










100% CD




A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze

pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support

together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on

smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.



100% CD



G. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and

larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;

fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

O. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:



100% CD



a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:





4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches .

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."



100% CD



C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing

systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and

tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4

to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.



100% CD



10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of


11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical

adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to

NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition

to expansion and contraction.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system




100% CD



1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.



100% CD



5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include

auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These

supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.

R. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.




100% CD



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



100% CD



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the

size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number

and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal

lettering.



100% CD



G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 incheshigh.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter

height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational

instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may

be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless


2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled

or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or



100% CD



space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099200 "High-Performance

Coatings."

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe

labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or

rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and

exterior exposed locations as follows:



100% CD



1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Cold Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Green.

b. Stripes: Black (One).

c. Letter Color: White.

2. Domestic Hot Water Piping:


b. Stripes: Black (Two).


3. Domestic Recirculated Hot Water Piping:


b. Stripes: Black (Three).


4. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Yellow.

b. Letter Color: White.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering

hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged

valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 2 inches, round.

b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round.



100% CD



2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: Green.

b. Hot Water: Green.

3. Letter Color:

a. Cold Water: White.

b. Hot Water: White.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING


SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Related Requirements:

1. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping outside the

building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water

service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.



100% CD



B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic

and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Hart Industries International, Inc.

d. Jomar International.

e. Matco-Norca.

f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456823037&mf=&src=wd










100% CD



3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:



the following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Matco-Norca.

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.


3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F .

5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:



the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:



the following:

a. Elster Perfection Corporation.

b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP.

c. Matco-Norca.

d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

e. Victaulic Company.

















100% CD



2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600

and AWWA M41.

D. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or

AWWA C105/A21.5.

E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside

the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure

gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for

drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

G. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping

Specialties."

H. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

I. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements.

J. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

K. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

L. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.



100% CD



M. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

N. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

O. Install piping free of sags and bends.

P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

C. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed

Joints" chapter.

D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.

Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and

thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to

ASME B31.9.

F. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of

both piping systems.

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.



100% CD




A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.


E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.


4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.


8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod.

G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's




100% CD



3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities

having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance

with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests

or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:



100% CD



a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air

bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered

or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof

until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping

to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.



100% CD



2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least

200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-

sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and

soldered joints.

D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or

gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.



100% CD






100% CD

WRL #15073.00 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES


SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall hydrants.



B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated.



100% CD



2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:



the following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Rain Bird Corporation.

f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.

g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.


3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

6. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:



the following:

a. Arrowhead Brass Products.

b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. Legend Valve.

e. MIFAB, Inc.

f. Prier Products, Inc.

g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

h. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.

i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.

j. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.


3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

2.4 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:





















100% CD





the following:

a. Arrowhead Brass Products.

b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC.

c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

d. Prier Products, Inc.

e. Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

f. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

g. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.

h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B.

3. Type: Freeze-resistant, automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve.

4. Classification: Type B, for automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached

and nozzle closed.

5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

6. Operation: Loose key.

7. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

8. Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.

9. Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor

drain.

3.2 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.











100% CD






100% CD






100% CD

WRL #15073.00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING


SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Specialty pipe fittings.


1. Section 334000 "Storm Drainage Utilities" for storm drainage piping outside the

building.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.






A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.



100% CD




A. Interruption of Existing Storm-Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of storm-

drainage service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of storm-drainage service without Owner's written

permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:



the following:

a. ANACO-Husky.

b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

c. Fernco Inc.

d. Matco-Norca, Inc.

e. MIFAB, Inc.

f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

g. Stant.

h. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2265&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd











100% CD



1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's

or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes

to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-

system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not


1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

2) Fernco Inc.

3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.

c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear

ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each

end.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible

with pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not


1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism

on each end.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings.











100% CD



B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and

long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of

standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of

drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

L. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains

specified in Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.



100% CD



3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.

2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.



6. Spacing for 10-foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting

to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.



100% CD



D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of

equipment.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified

in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of

roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but

not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until

completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.



100% CD



C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.




100% CD






100% CD

WRL #15073.00 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES


SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof drains.

2. Cleanouts.

3. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.

4. Flashing materials.

5. Roof overflow drainage system flow sensors.




A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains RD-1:



the following:

a. Josam Company.

b. Marathon Roofing Products.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

e. Tyler Pipe.








100% CD



f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.

3. Body Material: Cast iron.

4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 14-inch diameter.

5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.

6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required.

7. Outlet: Bottom.

8. Extension Collars: Not required.

9. Underdeck Clamp: Required.

10. Expansion Joint: Not required.

11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.

12. Dome Material: Cast iron.

13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Required. Stainless steel perforated screen for vegetative

roofing. see detail.

14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required.

15. Water Dam: Not required.

B. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains OD-1:



the following:

a. Josam Company.

b. Marathon Roofing Products.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

e. Tyler Pipe.

f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.

3. Body Material: Cast iron.

4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 14-inch diameter.

5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.

6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required.

7. Outlet: Bottom.

8. Extension Collars: Not required.

9. Underdeck Clamp: Required.

10. Expansion Joint: Not required.

11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.

12. Dome Material: Cast iron.

13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Required. Stainless steel perforated screen for vegetative

roofing. see detail.

14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required.

15. Water Dam: 2 inches high.












100% CD



2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Wall Cleanouts:



the following:

a. Josam Company.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil-

pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure: Countersunk, plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

7. Wall Access: Square, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation

frame and cover.

2.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:



the following:

a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: ASTM E 814, for through-penetration firestop assemblies.

3. Certification and Listing: Intertek Testing Service NA for through-penetration firestop

assemblies.

4. Size: Same as connected pipe.

5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing

flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene

O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap

for plug.

7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M,12 oz./sq. ft..









100% CD



B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-

inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-

phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum

thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units

required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM FLOW SENSORS

A. Roof overflow drainage flow sensors:



the following:

a. Froet Industries, LLC

2. Current and Voltage Output Control Module: 5 channel.

3. Description:

a. Provides notification to building management system of overflow situation on flat

building roof due to blockage of primary roof drainage system or inability of

primary system to adequately handle water load on roof.

b. Use with properly designed and maintained roof drainage system, where overflow

system flows water only in rare occasions due to blockage or excessive rainfall.

c. Monitors 1 overflow roof drain per sensor channel.

d. Provides alerts for both low and high flow conditions.

e. Provides monitoring of roof water level thru use of wall-mount weathertight

junction box.

f. Provides monitoring of relief valves of backwater preventers and sends signal to

valve actuator to stop water flow.

g. Registered flow level remains present until manually cleared.

B. Pipe Line Size: 2 inches thru 12 inches.

C. Pipe Material: PVC, steel, cast iron, or copper.

D. Sensor Pickup:

1. Material: Stainless steel.

2. Supplied in 6-inch-long section of PVC, steel, cast iron, or copper pipe.

3. Installed by no-hub gaskets or gluing PVC section into horizontal run of overflow

drainage line.

E. Signal sent out to pickup and back to control unit via low-voltage 12 V signal.



100% CD



F. Outputs: Current or voltage outputs to provide for connection to building management system

or to control valve actuators.

G. Sensor Inputs:

1. Common: Connection required for minimum or maximum inputs.

2. Minimum: Connection as needed for application.

3. Maximum: Connection as needed for application.

H. Unit Outputs:

1. Current Loop Output (“CUR”):

a. Level detection OFF.

b. Neither low “MIN” nor high “MAX” level condition detected.

c. Output: 3 mA, plus or minus 0.3 mA.

2. Current Loop Output (“CUR”):

a. Level detection ON.

b. Low “MIN” or high “MAX” level condition detected.

c. Output: 20 mA, plus or minus 2 mA.

3. Current Loop Fault Condition Detected:

a. Open circuit in loop.

b. Output: 0 mA.

4. Voltage Level Output (“VLT”):

a. Level detection OFF.


c. Output: 0 V, referenced to common ground.

5. Voltage Level Output (“VLT”):

a. Level detection ON.


c. Output: 10 V, plus or minus 1 V.

I. Alarms:

1. Low Level “MIN”: Yellow LED turns ON.

2. High Level “MAX”:

a. Red LED turns ON.

b. 2.5 kHz (nominal) audible alert turns ON.

J. Controls – Front Panel:

1. Reset (Alarm) Switch: Resets alarms to OFF state if alarm conditions no longer exist.

2. Alarm Silence Switch: Silences audible alarm when high level alarm conditions exist.

K. Control – External:

1. External Reset-Terminal Block Receptacle: Install external switch or dry-contact relay

closure for external means of resetting alarms.

L. Internal Battery Back-up:

1. 12 volts, 0.8 amp-hrs.

2. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 4 to 122 degrees F (minus 20 to 50 degrees C).

3. Recommended Life: 3 to 5 years.

4. UL recognized.

5. Provides continued functionality if AC power is out, up to approximately 24 hours for

single-channel alarm set.



100% CD



M. Power Indicators – Front Panel:

1. AC On: When lit, indicates AC power source (use power supply supplied or equivalent

12 VDC, 500 mA supply) is supplying power to unit.

2. DC On:

a. LED (AC): Lit when AC power source is supplying power to unit.

b. LED (DC): Lit when internal battery back-up is connected and charged.

N. Power Input:

1. 120 VAC, 60 Hz linear power supply with 12 VDC, 500 mA output.

2. UL listed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's

written installation instructions.

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and

adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.

3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following

instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger

drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping.

4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.

F. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.

G. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors at concrete floor

penetrations.

H. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.



100% CD



3.2 Install flow sensors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the

Drawings.

A. Install flow sensor pickup section with pickup connections:

1. Cast Iron, Steel, and Copper Pipe: On top of pipe.

2. PVC Pipe: With centerline mark on top of pipe.

3. In horizontal pipe run no closer than 4 pipe diameters, minimum 18 inches, to an

upstream elbow.

B. Wall mount roof monitor box with probes in downward position.

1. Cut probes to desired length.

C. Demonstration:

1. Demonstrate that flow sensors function properly.

2. Verify proper wiring by jumping high and low terminals at pickup to common terminal.

3. Perform demonstration at final system inspection.

D. Instruction and Training:

1. Provide instruction and training of Owner’s personnel as required for operation and

maintenance of flow sensors.

2. Provide hands-on demonstrations of operation of flow sensor components and complete

system.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage

Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes

are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.

Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches

and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.



100% CD



E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Duct labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:



100% CD



1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled

or stamped holes for attachment hardware.


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.







B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White .

3. Background Color: Blue .

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.







C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number

and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS



B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Red.




100% CD




by 3/4 inch.




lettering.



I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 DUCT LABELS



B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Blue.



by 3/4 inch.




lettering.



I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both

directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.



100% CD



2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height

of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door

labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Aluminum.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint

may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless


2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color

codes:

1. Blue : For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Yellow : For hot-air supply ducts.

3. Green : For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.



100% CD



B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of

50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.4 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.




100% CD






100% CD

WRL #15073.00 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC


SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.



100% CD



F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC NEBB

or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB

or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect Owner Construction Manager Commissioning Authority

on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the

details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven

days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures

specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect Owner

Construction Manager Commissioning Authority.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,

Section 5, "Instrumentation."

F. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air

Balancing."

G. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."



100% CD




A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB

period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and

times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to

verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 233113 "Metal

Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls

are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.



100% CD



2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned

and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and

record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.

7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" NEBB's "Procedural Standards for

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.



100% CD



2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"

Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping

Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.



100% CD



a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse

measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total

airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct

restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum

that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,

rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-

recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to

accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Architect Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed

higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for

air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-

handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate

the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust

volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust

submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.



100% CD



1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of

indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the

dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the

Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying

from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper

operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,

serial number, and nameplate data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.

3. Check the refrigerant charge.

4. Check the condition of filters.

5. Check the condition of coils.

6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.

7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.

8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is

to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

Verify the following:



100% CD



1. New filters are installed.

2. Coils are clean and fins combed.

3. Drain pans are clean.

4. Fans are clean.

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are

affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and

determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face

velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment

manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5

percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or

decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent .

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent .

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent .

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent .

3.9 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate

proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC

systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing

devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems

found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each

building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.10 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.



100% CD



1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:



100% CD



1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number, make, and size of belts.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

F. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft..



100% CD



g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual air flow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

G. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.11 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance

readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.

c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.

d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that

testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request

that a final inspection be made by Architect Owner Construction Manager

Commissioning Authority.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the

presence of Architect Owner Construction Manager Commissioning Authority.

3. Architect Owner Construction Manager Commissioning Authority shall randomly select

measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be

limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of

measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."



100% CD



5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,

proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing

device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final

inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB

contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the

cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 DUCT INSULATION


SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

2. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.


1. Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."

2. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).


1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each

type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing

product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.

2. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.

3. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.



100% CD




A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates

of tests and test methods employed.



A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,

and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before

preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.



100% CD



1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum

Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"

articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply

with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Sheet, K-Flex Gray Duct Liner, and K-FLEX LS.

G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-applied FSK

jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3062&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd












100% CD



H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide

insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified

in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.

b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.

c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.

d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.

e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.

f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with

ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612,

Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F

is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in

"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.

b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.

c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing board

suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with ASTM C 656, Type II,

Grade 6. Tested and certified to provide a 1 -hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to




a. Johns Manville; Super Firetemp M.

B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested

and certified to provide a 1 -hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.




















100% CD



b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.

c. Nelson Fire Stop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket.

d. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.

e. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.

f. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.

c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-75.K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; CP-127.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.



D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



Company; CP-82.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-50.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.






























100% CD



E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.

b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.

c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.



2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.



a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

c. .

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry

film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



Company; CP-50 AHV2.Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a

business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.
















100% CD



3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

5. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:



Company; CP-76.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 95-44.

c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: Aluminum.

6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




Company; CP-76.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White.

6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.













100% CD



3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to

ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands by 5

strands/sq. in. for covering ducts.




Company; Chil-Glas No. 5.

B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.



a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a

minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..



a. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59..

2.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.












100% CD




a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.

d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect.

D. Metal Jacket:



Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate..

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,

Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing .

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper .

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn.

3. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing .

b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper .

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn.

E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing

membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a

rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white

aluminum-foil facing.



a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.














100% CD



2.11 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.

b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.

c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.

d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

5. Elongation: 2 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;

complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.


c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.

d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.





7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;

suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.

b. Compac Corporation; 130.

c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 6 mils.




















100% CD



D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.


c. Compac Corporation; 120.

d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches.





2.12 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:



a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

c. .

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015

inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of

insulation indicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.

2) GEMCO; CD.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit

depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
















100% CD




1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1.

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in

position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following

requirements:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches

square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel , fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened

to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely

in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following

requirements:



1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.

2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

2. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is

capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when

self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

















100% CD



1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Self-Adhering Insul-Hangers.

2) GEMCO; Peel & Press.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.

b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel , fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,

galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in

place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

4. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-

thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place

but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.



1) GEMCO.

2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel .



a. C & F Wire.

2.13 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to

ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.
















100% CD



C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according

to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for

each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.



100% CD



2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive

self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of

roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.



100% CD



B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves

to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping", firestopping

and fire-resistive joint sealers.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper

sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct

insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:



100% CD



a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.



100% CD



b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and

inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with

individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints.



100% CD



5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks

and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.8 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and

supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified

in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.9 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and as specified in Section 099100.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.



B. Perform tests and inspections.



100% CD



C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be

limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

2. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.

2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

5. Flexible connectors.

6. Vibration-control devices.

7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of

building exterior shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Concealed, exhaust-air plenum insulation shall be one of the following:



D. Exposed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation in attic shall be one of the following:





100% CD



3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:

1. PVC, 30 mils, off-white.




100% CD






100% CD

WRL #15073.00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES


SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Manual volume dampers.

3. Control dampers.

4. Flange connectors.

5. Duct-mounted access doors.

6. Flexible connectors.

7. Duct accessory hardware.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.

b. Manual volume damper installations.

c. Control-damper installations.

d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and

corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors

and remote damper operators.

e. Duct security bars.

f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted

access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.



100% CD




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2

finish for concealed ducts and No.2 finish for exposed ducts.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for

concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.

4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456821227&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd






100% CD



5. Lloyd Industries, Inc.

6. Nailor Industries Inc.

7. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.

8. Pottorff.

9. Ruskin Company.

10. Vent Products Company, Inc..

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm 1250 fpm 2000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg 2-inch wg 3-inch wg.

E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.063-inch- thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners or mechanically

attached and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch-

thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Aluminum.

2. Diameter: 0.20 inch .

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.

3. Electric actuators.

4. Chain pulls.

5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum.

b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

7. Screen Material: Aluminum.

8. Screen Type: Bird.

9. 90-degree stops.









100% CD



2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS


following :

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,

gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


following :

1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.


4. Elgen Manufacturing.

5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.


7. McGill AirFlow LLC.

8. Nailor Industries Inc.

9. Pottorff.

10. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

















100% CD



a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure

class.

3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure

ducts.

4. Factory set at 3.0- to 8.0-inch wg .

5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.

6. Hinge: Continuous piano.

7. Latches: Cam.

8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.

9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.6 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES


following :


2. Flame Gard, Inc.

3. 3M.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.

D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for

minimum 2000 deg F.

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


following :


2. Duro Dyne Inc.








100% CD



3. Elgen Manufacturing.

4. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to

two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick

aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,

synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.




G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.




H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant

coating.

1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd.



I. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in

compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan

discharge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of

30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.






100% CD



6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at

start and stop.

2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous

Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust

fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with

hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Connect ducts to duct silencers with flexible duct connectors.

I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters.



100% CD



3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

4. At drain pans and seals.

5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.

6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure

relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream

from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. Control devices requiring inspection.

8. Elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

L. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

N. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with

loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

O. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible

duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

P. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of

flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

Q. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

R. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

S. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust

limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and

stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.



100% CD



2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.

3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00


HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Roof curbs.

7. Fan speed controllers.


1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For unit hangars and supports indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00



233423 - 2

1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames

for equipment mounting.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for

designing vibration isolation bases.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the

items involved:

1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and





1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the

AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for

restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00



233423 - 3

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.


3. Hartzell Fan Incorporated.

4. Loren Cook Company.

5. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Removable, extruded-aluminum, rectangular top ; square, one-piece, aluminum base

with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,

with rain and snow drains.

2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and

maintenance.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

3. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;

wired to close when fan stops.

F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid,

fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as

required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange .

2. Overall Height: Coordinate height with the roofing and vegetative roof height.









100% CD

WRL #15073.00



233423 - 4

3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

4. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements

for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan

Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,

"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified

Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of

rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of

Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified

Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install power ventilators on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13

"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 077200

"Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00



233423 - 5

E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with

vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) . Vibration-control devices are

specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

G. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension.

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00



233423 - 6

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"

for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less. 3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.







A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Alpha Wire Company.

2. Belden Inc.

3. Cooper Industries, Inc.

4. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.

5. Senator Wire & Cable Company.

6. Southwire Company.

7. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.











100% CD



B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES



1. 3M.

2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.

3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

4. Ideal Industries, Inc.

5. ILSCO.

6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class

for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except

VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING

METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in

raceway.










100% CD



E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26

05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not

deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling

tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not

damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow

surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical

Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor,

and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original

fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."





100% CD



B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance

with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION 26 05 19



100% CD

WRL #15073.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.

2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.

3. ERICO International Corporation.

4. Fushi Copperweld Inc.

5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.

6. Harger Lightning & Grounding.

7. ILSCO.




100% CD




9. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.


2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable

Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches

wide and 1/16 inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules;

1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which

used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials

being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals,

and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG

and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.





100% CD



3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or

required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,

impact, or damage.



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized,

test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical

connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.





100% CD

WRL #15073.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for the following:

a. Hangers.

b. Steel slotted support systems.

c. Nonmetallic support systems.

d. Trapeze hangers.

e. Clamps.

f. Turnbuckles.

g. Sockets.

h. Eye nuts.

i. Saddles.

j. Brackets.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. For fabrication and installation

details for electrical hangers and support systems.

1. Trapeze hangers. Include product data for components.

2. Steel slotted-channel systems.

3. Nonmetallic slotted-channel systems.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems.

1. Include design calculations and details of trapeze hangers.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.



100% CD



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality

Requirements," to design hanger and support system.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify

products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1.

2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

b. B-line, an Eaton business.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. Flex-Strut Inc.

e. GS Metals Corp.

f. G-Strut.

g. Haydon Corporation.

h. Metal Ties Innovation.

i. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.

j. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

k. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Material: Galvanized steel.

3. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.

4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types

and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and

insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs

shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors

or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars;

black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports

to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported

loads and building materials where used.















100% CD



a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the

following:

1) B-line, an Eaton business.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti, Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18

units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached

structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment

and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes

for Electrical Systems."

C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs,

IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified

design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and

smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for

fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs may

be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be

adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design

load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.









100% CD



D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing

bars.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after

erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1

requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair

paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and

cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment

details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide

products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.

2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

3. FSR Inc.


5. Robroy Industries.

6. Southwire Company.


8. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.

9. Wheatland Tube Company.















100% CD



B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: Setscrew.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for

environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS



1. B-line, an Eaton business.

2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.

3. MonoSystems, Inc.

4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated,

and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-

down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete

system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide

products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

4. FSR Inc.

5. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.

6. Hubbell Incorporated.

















100% CD




8. RACO; Hubbell.

9. Robroy Industries.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.


12. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in

wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed

cover.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum

with gasketed cover.

G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

I. Gangable boxes are allowed.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1with continuous-hinge cover with

flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,

finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 in damp or wet

locations.













100% CD



B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise

indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on

Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed

in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install

horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for

hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring

conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install

conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an

enclosure.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect

conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or

cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-

1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding

bushings on service conduits.

L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand

tight plus 1/4 turn more.

M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the

locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a

guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.



100% CD



O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than

200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground

raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

P. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed

sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover

plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings

according to NFPA 70.

Q. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are

between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the

following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the

following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length

of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide

expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of

temperature change for metal conduits.

3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion

joints.

4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according

to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation.

Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible

conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and

motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually

indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless


U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and

install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight

connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical

channel.

W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or

mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.



100% CD



Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.

3. Identification for conductors.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Instruction signs.

6. Equipment identification labels, including arc-flash warning labels.

7. Miscellaneous identification products.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.

B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be an

index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and

labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with ASME A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.



100% CD



E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label

printers, shall comply with UL 969.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.


2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage[ and system or service type].

2.3 LABELS

A. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with

a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for

securing label ends.



a. Brady Corporation.

b. Champion America.

c. Grafoplast Wire Markers.

d. LEM Products Inc.

e. Marking Services, Inc.

f. Panduit Corp.

g. Seton Identification Products.

B. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,

flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters of raceways they

identify, and that stay in place by gripping action.




b. Marking Services, Inc.

c. Panduit Corp.

d. Seton Identification Products.

2.4 BANDS AND TUBES:

A. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored

acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters of raceways or cables they identify,

and that stay in place by gripping action.





c. Panduit Corp.






















100% CD



B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed identification

labels, sized to suit diameters of and shrunk to fit firmly around cables they identify. Full shrink recovery

occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.




b. Panduit Corp.

2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS:

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend

machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.



a. Carlton Industries, LP.


c. Ideal Industries, Inc.

d. Marking Services, Inc.

e. Panduit Corp.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils thick by 1

to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.




b. Carlton Industries, LP.

c. Marking Services, Inc.

C. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits 600 V or Less: 4-inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch

centers placed diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12

inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.



a. LEM Products Inc.


c. Seton Identification Products.

D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and

clear vinyl overlay.




b. Seton Identification Products.

2.6 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-

locking cable tie fastener.




























100% CD






d. Seton Identification Products.

B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch thick, color-coded for phase and voltage

level, with factory screened or printed permanent designations; punched for use with self-locking cable

tie fastener.





c. Grafoplast Wire Markers.

d. LEM Products Inc.

e. Marking Services, Inc.

f. Panduit Corp.

g. Seton Identification Products.

C. Write-On Tags:




b. LEM Products Inc.

c. Seton Identification Products.

2. Polyester Tags: 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to

raceway, conductor, or cable.

3. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by

printer manufacturer.

2.7 SIGNS

A. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required

for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.






B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-inch

galvanized-steel backing and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


b. emedco.




































100% CD



C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Engraved legend.

2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. inches, minimum 1/16-inch-.

b. For signs larger than 20 sq. inches, 1/8 inch thick.

c. Engraved legend with white letters on a dark grey background.

d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.






2.8 CABLE TIES



1. Ideal Industries, Inc.

2. Marking Services, Inc.

3. Panduit Corp.

B. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

C. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-

extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.


4. Color: Black.

D. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.


5. Color: Black.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements.

Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with

nuts and flat and lock washers.















100% CD



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates

of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of

identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in

other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring

diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference

with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of

identifying devices.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the

location and substrate.

G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint

application.

I. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a

location with high visibility and accessibility.

J. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall

completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in

straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Feeder and Branch Circuits, More Than

30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 10-foot maximum

intervals.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes, use

color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.



100% CD



1. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below

for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow.

C. Install instructional sign, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using

adhesive-film-type labels.

D. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, use write-

on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

E. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide heat-

shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation.

F. Conductors To Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal

connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull

points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker-tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by

manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation

and maintenance manual.

H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is

consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. Apply labels to

disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,

terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Identify upstream power source, equipment name and circuit

number. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm unless

equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic label, punched or

drilled for mechanical fasteners. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text

with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required,

use labels 2 inches high.

b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing

from the floor.

c. Unless labels are provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten them with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the

enclosure.

2. Equipment To Be Labeled:



100% CD



a. Panelboards: Printed directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard

manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of an engraved laminated

acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

d. Enclosed switches.

e. Enclosed circuit breakers.

f. Enclosed controllers.

g. New controllers or circuit breakers installed in existing motor control centers.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00 WIRING DEVICES


SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Straight-blade convenience, receptacles.

2. GFCI receptacles.

3. Wall plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations of Manufacturers' Names:

1. Cooper: Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Hubbell: Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Devices-Kellems.

3. Leviton: Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc.

4. Pass & Seymour: Pass& Seymour/Legrand.

B. BAS: Building automation system.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.





100% CD




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label

warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the

following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from

single manufacturer.

2.2 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.



a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). Cat #5362

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Cat #HBL5362

c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. Cat#5362

d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). Cat# 5362

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. 125 V, 20 A, straight blade, [feed] [non-feed]-through type.

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and

FS W-C-596.

3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides

proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles:











100% CD



a. Eaton (Arrow Hart).

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled

for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-

cast aluminum with lockable cover, with “in use” cover.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise

indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and

do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint,

and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the

joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on

devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring

or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.







100% CD



3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300,

without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before

building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible

moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor

tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles

to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes

when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not

required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot stamped, or engraved

machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside

outlet boxes.


A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections



100% CD



1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

C. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker,

poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct

circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified

above.

D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


FASHION INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY FIT PROJECT 12825


90% CD

WRL #15073.00 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS


SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Nonfusible switches.

2. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features,

performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).

4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.




90% CD



1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and

Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices,

components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches

and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104

deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.



90% CD



1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served

and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment

access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



1. Eaton.

2. General Electric Company.

3. Siemens Industry, Inc.

4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in

closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for

copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before

switch blades open.

4. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

6.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply

with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.








90% CD




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary

blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting

supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance

Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after

Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker.

Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration

record for device.



90% CD



4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and

circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial

action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.




100% CD

WRL #15073.00

©W estlake Reed Leskosky MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

262913- 1

SECTION 262913- MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual motor controllers.

2. Enclosed full-voltage magnetic motor controllers.

3. Combination full-voltage magnetic motor controllers.

4. Enclosures.

5. Accessories.

6. Identification.

B. Coordinate with Division 22 and Division 23 Specification section and drawings. Coordinate

controllers with motors and equipment provided. Coordinate controller with Building Control

System requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. NC: Normally closed.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SCPD: Short-circuit protective device.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00


262913- 2

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of magnetic controller.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Wire Termination Diagrams and Schedules: Include diagrams for signal, and control

wiring. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color-codes to facilitate

installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and

circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features.

Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Include features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

C. Product Schedule: List the following for each enclosed controller:

1. Each installed magnetic controller type.

2. NRTL listing.

3. Factory-installed accessories.

4. Nameplate legends.

5. SCCR of integrated unit.

6. For each combination magnetic controller include features, characteristics, ratings, and

factory setting of the SCPD and OCPD.

a. Listing document proving Type 2 coordination.

7. For each series-rated combination state the listed integrated short-circuit current

(withstand) rating of SCPD and OCPDs by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For magnetic controllers to include in operation and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Routine maintenance requirements for magnetic controllers and installed

components.

b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and

MCP trip settings.

c. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

d. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been

installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor

nameplate full-load currents.

e. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after

motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for

motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00


262913- 3




1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed.

4. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.



A. Store controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

Protect controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical

damage.


A. Ambient Environment Ratings: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 23 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet for electromagnetic and manual devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label magnetic motor controllers to comply with UL 508 and

UL 60947-4-1.

C. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate motor controllers to comply with ICS 2.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00


262913- 4

2.2 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers (FHPMC): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or

push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Eaton.

b. General Electric Company.

c. Siemens Industry, Inc.

d. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing.

3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;

external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2, bimetallic class as schedule on Drawings.

5. Pilot Light: Red.

2.3 ENCLOSED FULL-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Description: Across-the-line start, electrically held, for nominal system voltage of 600-V ac and

less.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Eaton.




C. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

D. Configuration: Nonreversing.

E. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

1. Operating Voltage: Manufacturer's standard, unless indicated.

F. Control Power:

1. For on-board control power, obtain from line circuit or from integral CPT. The CPT shall

have capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and

control devices.

a. Spare CPT Capacity 50 VA.

G. Overload Relays:

1. Thermal Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 10 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase shall be matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

















100% CD

WRL #15073.00


262913- 5

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.

2.4 COMBINATION FULL-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLER

A. Description: Factory-assembled, combination full-voltage magnetic motor controller consisting

of the controller described in this article, indicated disconnecting means, SCPD and OCPD, in a

single enclosure.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Eaton.




C. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

D. Configuration: Nonreversing.

E. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

1. Operating Voltage: Manufacturer's standard, unless indicated.

F. Control Power:

1. For on-board control power, obtain from line circuit or from integral CPT. The CPT shall

have capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and

control devices.

a. Spare CPT Capacity as Indicated on Drawings: 50 VA.

G. Overload Relays:

1. Thermal Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 10 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase shall be matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.

H. MCP Disconnecting Means:

1. UL 489 and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault

currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-

circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

2. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Comply with NEMA 250, type designations as indicated on Drawings, complying with

environmental conditions at installed location.










100% CD

WRL #15073.00


262913- 6

B. The construction of the enclosures shall comply with NEMA ICS 6.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in

controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, except as needed to

match enclosure type. Heavy-duty or oil-tight where indicated in the controller schedule.

a. Push Buttons: Reset.

b. Pilot Lights: Green and red.

B. Motor protection relays shall be with solid-state sensing circuit and isolated output contacts for

hardwired connections.

1. Phase-failure.

2. Phase-reversal, with bicolor LED to indicate normal and fault conditions. Automatic reset

when phase reversal is corrected.

3. Under/overvoltage, operate when the circuit voltage reaches a preset value, and drop out

when the operating voltage drops to a level below the preset value. Include adjustable

time-delay setting.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Controller Nameplates: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as described in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems," for each compartment, mounted with

corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Arc-Flash Warning Labels:

1. Comply with requirements in Section 260574 "Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash

Study." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch self-adhesive equipment label for each work location

included in the analysis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for motor controllers,

their relationship with the motors, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install magnetic controllers on walls with tops at uniform height

indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels



100% CD

WRL #15073.00


262913- 7

bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with

Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Controllers mounted in existing equipment: Install controllers per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

D. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.

E. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess

and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and

distribution spools.

F. Setting of Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full-load current rating as

shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required by NFPA 70 for

motors that are high-torque, high-efficiency, and so on.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter.

2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

d. Verify the unit is clean.

e. Inspect contactors:

1) Verify mechanical operation.

2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are according to

manufacturer's published data.

f. Motor-Running Protection:

1) Verify overload element rating is correct for its application.

2) If motor-running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:



100% CD

WRL #15073.00


262913- 8

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance

values with values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate

from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the

lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall be according to

manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published

data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.

h. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving

and sliding surfaces.

3. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase

and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Insulation-

resistance values shall be according to manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.1. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use

Table 100.5. Values of insulation resistance less than those of this table or

manufacturer's recommendations shall be investigated and corrected.

b. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each

other by more than 15 percent.

c. Test motor protection devices according to manufacturer's published data.

d. Test circuit breakers as follows:

1) Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.

2) For adjustable circuit breakers, adjust protective device settings according to

the coordination study. Comply with coordination study recommendations.

e. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.

4. Infrared Inspection: Perform the survey during periods of maximum possible loading.

Remove all necessary covers prior to the inspection.

a. Comply with the recommendations of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods"

Chapter, "Infrared Inspection" Article.

b. After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,

perform infrared inspection of the electrical power connections of each motor

controller.

c. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each motor controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

d. Report of Infrared Inspection: Prepare a certified report that identifies the testing

technician and equipment used, and lists the following results:

1) Description of equipment to be tested.

2) Discrepancies.

3) Temperature difference between the area of concern and the reference area.

4) Probable cause of temperature difference.

5) Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and unobservable areas and

equipment.

6) Load conditions at time of inspection.

7) Photographs and thermograms of the deficient area.

8) Recommended action.

e. Equipment: Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of

detecting a minimum temperature difference of 1?C at 30?C. The equipment shall

detect emitted radiation and convert detected radiation to a visual signal.



100% CD

WRL #15073.00


262913- 9

f. Act on inspection results and recommended action, and considering the

recommendations of NETA ATS, Table 100.18. Correct possible and probable

deficiencies as soon as Owner's operations permit. Retest until deficiencies are

corrected.

E. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS

A. System function tests shall prove the correct interaction of sensing, processing, and action

devices. Perform system function tests after field quality control tests have been completed and

all components have passed specified tests.

1. Develop test parameters and perform tests for the purpose of evaluating performance of

integral components and their functioning as a complete unit within design requirements

and manufacturer's published data.

2. Verify the correct operation of interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition

to design function.

3. Verify the correct operation of sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.

B. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass the system function tests and

inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.
